Home

Owner`s Manual

Contents

1. 154 Echo Pan 2 221 Hawaiian Gt 288 Flute 355 Rain 155 Big Panner 222 Clean Gt 289 Recorder 356 Thunder 156 Ai yai a 223 Chorus Gt 290 Pan Flute 357 Wind 157 Saturn Rings 224 Muted Gt 291 Bottle Blow 358 Stream 158 Star Theme 225 Funk Gt 292 Shakuhachi 359 Bubble 159 Rising Osc 226 Funk Gt 2 293 Whistle 360 Bird 160 Galaxy Way 227 Overdrive Gt 294 Ocarina 361 Dog 161 12th Planet 228 DistortionGt 295 Square Wave 362 Horse Gallop 162 PolySweep Nz 229 Feedback Gt 296 Square 363 Bird 2 163 En co re 230 Gt Harmonics 297 Sine Wave 364 Telephone 1 164 Piano 1 231 Gt Feedback 298 Saw Wave 365 Telephone 2 165 Piano 1w 232 Acoustic Bs 299 Saw 366 DoorCreaking 166 Piano 1d 233 Fingered Bs 300 Doctor Solo 367 Door 167 Piano 2 234 Picked Bs 301 Syn Calliope 368 Scratch 168 Piano 2w 235 Fretless Bs 302 Chiffer Lead 369 Windchime 169 Piano 3 236 Slap Bass 1 303 Charang 370 Helicopter 17
2. Pop Rock 1 80s Rock 2 Idol Ballad 3 Pop 4 80s Pop 1 5 Funky Disco 6 AdultContemp 7 Uptown Rock 8 80sRetroDsco 9 UK Rock 21st 0 16BtBrassRck 1 Barry Dance 2 70 s Pop 3 Soft Rock 4 Cool Pop 5 DiscoShuffl 6 Analog Beat 7 Rock Beat 8 Hip Beat 9 EZ Listening 20 Strumin Away 21 70s Disco 1 22 SmoothContmp 23 Simple Rock 24 60s Feelin 25 16Beat Pop 26 Light Pop 27 Bright Pop 28 Heart Beat 29 Easy Pop 30 80s Pop 2 31 80s Pop 3 32 Cute Pop 33 LovelyShuffl 34 70s Disco 2 35 70s Dance 36 Fever Dance 37 Euro Dance 38 Hard Tekno 39 Big House 40 90s House 41 House Pop 42 Ibiza Dance 43 Cool Rap 44 Now Hip Hop 45 Twostep 46 HipHop Beat 47 Hip n Hop 48 Easy Hop 49 MorningShffl 50 Groovy Pop 51 Smile Pop 52 Warm Pop 53 Sunny Pop 54 Feel Good 55 US Groove 56 Steady Rock 57 Shuffle Rock 58 Dyno Rock 59 Power Rock 60 Heavy Rock 61 Thump Rock 62 Asian Pop Ballad Acoustic 1 AmericanRock 4 ModernBallad 5 80s Ballad 6 AcoustBallad 7 AcoustEzLstn 8 UnpluggedPop 9 UnplugBallad 0 Adult Pop 1 1 Adult Pop 2 2 6 8Unplugged 3 6 8GuitarPop 4 Acoustic Pop 5 Live Pop 6 Love Ballad 7 6 8 Ballad 8 Love Beat 9 UnplugShuffl 20 CoolLiveBand 21 Night Ballad 22 GuitarShu
3. 43 Digi Church 54 Finger Slap 44 VS Organ 55 Mr Smooth 45 Metalic Org 56 Slap Bass 1 46 CheeseOrgan 57 Slap Bass 2 47 Accordion Fr 58 Synth Bass 1 48 AccordionFr2 59 Jungle Bass 49 Accordion It 60 Hammer 50 Bright Acco 61 SynthBass101 51 Soft Acco 62 ResoSH Bass 52 Bandoneon 63 Acid Bass 53 Harmonica 64 Clavi Bass 65 Synth Bass 2 Guitar Bass 66 Beef FM Bass 67 Attack Pulse 1 EX Nylon Gir 68 Rubber Bass 2 ClearSteelGt 6 gt SC 3 Jazz Guitar2 9 zitat S 4 FLGtr Roll El panjo 5 Mandolin 72 Shamisen 6 JC Chorus Gt 73 Koto 7 TC Clean ff 74 Taisho Koto 8 Overdrive Gt 9 DistortionGt Stri ngs 10 Amore Story 11 EX A Guitar2 1 Full Strings 12 EX Steel Gt2 2 Rich Strings 13 Uncle Martin 3 Studio Sect 14 Flamenco Gtr 4 Dolce Qrt 15 Jazz Guitar 5 Lunar Strngs 16 Wild Ac Bs 6 R amp B SoftPad 17 Wood Bass 7 Wind amp Str 18 W Bass Ride 8 Aerial Harp 19 Fingered Bs 9 Violin 20 Picked Bass 10 Cello 21 Fretless Bs 11 Octave Pizz 22 Nylon Guitar 12 Silky Way 23 Requint Gtr 13 Strings Pad 24 EX Ac Guitar 14 2 way Sect 25 EX Steel Gt 15 DolceStrings 26 Steel str Gt 16 Velo Strings 27 12 str Gt 17 Harp Strings 28 Steel Body 18 Mellow Str 29 Nylon
4. Power Creates a sound with boosted bass Cancelling the Dynamics Emphasis 3 Press the Sound Control button once more and the indicator light goes out 43 Chapter 1 Performance Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality Equalizer The KR features a built in five band digital equalizer An equalizer boosts or cuts specific sound pitches frequency ranges to adjust the sound balance for the overall performance For example you can boost the highs to get a crisper sound or boost the low end for a more powerful sound You can also adjust the sound to compensate for the acoustical characteristics of the performance space If raising the slider for each frequency ends up distorting the sound you can correct the distortion with the Master Level slider 1 Press the Sound Control button to display the Dynamic Emphasis screen 2 Touch lt Equalizer gt The Equalizer screen appears Ps co es oo Piano Mild Gear Dunanics am User _ Flat 3 Touch the Type icon to make your selection Display Explanation Piano The optimal settings for piano performance are selected Power Boosts both the low and high frequency ranges Mild Lows and highs are restrained for a pleasant sounding tone Clear This setting slightly boosts the midrange for a simple pop feeling Bright This setting boosts the high frequenci
5. What is the rotary effect j E Se D Gene split performance p 31 changes the pitch of sounds in the SN S SE SE Ss to 2 SR KE EE right hand side of the keyboard Additionally the range in EE which the pitch can change when the Bender effect is used is Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this called the bend range refer to Changing the Bend Range spinning effect Pedal Setting p 169 168 Chapter 10 Various Settings O Functions that can be assigned Expression Pedals Only Function Explanation Expression Adjusts the overall volume EX1 When the pedal is pressed during a layer performance the Tone volume changes between two levels depending on how firmly the pedal is pressed Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX1 selected increases the layer Tone volume The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume regardless of how forcefully the keys are played EX2 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX2 selected increases the layer Tone volume while the volume of the right hand Tone is decreased The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume regardless of how forcefully the keys are played EX3 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX3 selected increases the layer Tone volume EX4 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX4 selected increases the layer Tone volume while the volume of the right hand Tone is decreased E Changing the Bend Ra
6. 216 Music Files That the KR Can Ugen 217 The KR allows you to use the following MUSIC filee e die eh elt ede es 217 About the KR Sound Generator 217 Main Gpechficattonsg 219 IndeX EE 13 Panel Descriptions 3 5 7 9 11 12 14 18 19 20 Music Style ait 5 sno e Sound Control Part Balance Transpose ERRI Or Be rator Fun tio ke ock d Sir sc Se at Kl ing am Wa Sc o Count Metronome s i O O Oe Gr EE EE EE OO Reverb User arker Volume Brilliance Balance Vocal Effects User Program C00 EEN 2 4 6 8 10 es kee Power switch Pressed to switch the power on and off p 21 The KR115 s Power switch is located at the left of the keyboard Volume knob Adjusts the overall volume p 22 Sound Control button Add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and distinctness p 43 Brilliance knob Adjusts the brightness of the sound p 22 Part Balance button This adjusts the relative volume levels of each of the performance parts p 73 Balance knob Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the keyboard and for songs and accompaniments p 73 Transpose button Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being played p 102 Vocal Effects Button Applies a variety of effects to vocals from the microphone p 47 Surround Reverb button Adds reverberation to the sound p 34 Adds three dimensional breadth to the sound p 36 10 Use
7. Detailed Song Playback Settings E Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs Play Mode With the normal setting GS tones sounds that are compatible with other GS instruments will normally be used to play back song data By changing this setting you can play back song using KR specific tones for certain portions of the data gt For detailed information about GS refer to About the KR Sound Generator p 217 1 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears 2 Touch L L to switch the screens touch lt Play Mode gt A screen like the one shown below appears Music Files Playback Mode GS conpliant tones used for G playback Result is same as that from any other GS instrument Use KR tones for some tones Performance becomes more expressive 3 Touch the icon to choose the setting Icon Explanation Playback uses GS compatible tones for GS performances that sound like other GS instruments Playback uses KR tones for greater expressiveness However differences may appear when playing back using devices other than the KR KR 4 Press the Exit button to go back to The Composer Menu screen 5 After changing this setting try selecting the song once again For more detailed information about selecting a song refer to Playing a Song p 75 182 E Viewing Song Information Info
8. returned to the Song Edit screen If you touch lt OK gt the confirmation message appears on screen Touch lt OK gt to undone the most recent edit 145 D Q H H VI Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs E Copying Measures Copy You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in the same Part or to a measure in another Part This is handy when you re composing a song that repeats a similar phrase Ex To copy measures 5 7 to measure 8 At Step 3 of Selecting the Editing Function p 145 select lt Copy gt A screen like the one shown below appears Copy HK Mode Replace 1 S Uh Times From Sre Al Tines 1 1 Execute Item Content Measure number of the first measure of the From S segment to be copied For Number of measures to be copied Copy source Track button or part number Choosing All copies all Parts appears Src in the lt Dst gt column If you choose a Track you can only copy to the selected Track You cannot copy to the other Track appears in the lt Dst gt column Dst Copy destination part number Data can be copied in the following three ways Replace If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination this previous recording is erased and the copied data is written in its place Mix If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination the cop
9. Musical i Te Instruments e t c To simultaneously record usin i musical ears connect e Jack Panel Front Jack Panel Rear If both the output for A V Aux Output Balanced Out Fixed Sync and AUX input are we Pita O O connected simultaneously ce please set Mode of the Aux O O RA input to Off S Man oput po sc If this is set to anything other B B than Off make sure to Audio cable disconnect any cables connected to Aux Out or Balanced Out OUT BUT Video Camera D t If such connections are left _ Musical LINE IN E intact you may likely INPUT T T encounter a loud continuous Instruments VIDEO OUT e t c m beep tone VIDEON Video Equipment 122 Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys A V sync 1 e Press the Menu button The A V Sync display will appear If the Composer Menu screen appears touch L to switch the page A U Sync Rec Mode MovingKey EREM 2 Touch the lt A V Sync Output gt The following display will appear A U Sync Output PA Connect the recording device to Balanced Out vith the Once recording starts touch Begin Output SS K 9 40 dDy5 a i see 3 Start recording with the connected device 4 Touch the lt Begin Output gt The following message appears A U Sync Output l
10. Power Consumption 360 W 270 W 230 W Dimensions including the caster cup 1503 W x 1579 D x 1007 H mm 59 3 16 W x 62 3 16 D x 39 11 16 H inches 1473 W x 937 D x 930 H mm 58 W x 36 15 16 D x 36 5 8 H inches Lid Open 1503 W x 1579 D x 1741 H mm 59 3 16 W x 62 3 16 D x 68 9 16 H inches Lid Open 1473 W x 937 D x 1446 H mm 58 W x 36 15 16 D x 56 15 16 inches Weights including the piano stand 240 kg 530 Ibs 140 kg 310 lbs 115 kg 255 Ibs Accessories Quick Start Owner s Manual Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces Remote Control CD Music Data Disc with vocals KR117M KR115M Dry cell Batteries USB Installation Guide CD ROM Roland Digital Piano USB Driver Power cord Anti theft lock screws Maintenance Kit Key Cover Caster Cup Options USB Memory Floppy Disk Drive In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 220 Numerics 16 Track Geguencer i esili iinei iias ebith 136 A A V SYNC sarp ro ra AEA 122 AC Inlet E ES E 16 21 Access Indicator cc edd Eege hates bead 17 Accompaniment Start and E E 65 SL 65 Advanced 3D eegene genee bates 39 Ambience Reverb button 0 ccceceeeseeseeeeeeeees 39 40 Arranger basic screen scccesesesesteteseeeeteeseecesesesesnaenens 69 Arranger Config Aihen iiris iR Ks parE
11. ccccsseeseeeceeeseseeeeneesesesneenes 16 Ext Display connector 1 cece cseeteseeestenenene 24 186 External Display ccccccscsssssseeseeseseteseees 24 185 186 External Memory cccccccscesesesesneseeseeseteeececeesesesneenes 113 221 F Factory Reset ves cccseveecscieceveedscsesencadenedessassesetercasvestvensess 172 Factory Setting TOUCH E EE 175 User Memory En 180 BAW OFItOS Siete hoists Wees 82 116 Registering EEN 82 REMOVING EEN 83 PAM Ii E 68 Fill In To Original en 57 Fill In To Variation sensisisrecren gn 57 Finger NUMmDELS neen 90 POET AS E 114 FW button oo eee ee riiinig riris 76 G G nera MIDI sginean a 217 General MIDI 2 ees 217 Eat leaks cee Ries Sener EA ee Sie 217 GS Formata ee EES 217 H Harm rist EE 49 apen ee T cabseThasesnne Tota ees of 70 Headphones en 23 l TOON E EPE E EE 26 E KO o 0 1e I ois eset E wialdsnrsstorts 118 Taput Jacks erisir eiiiai deet A 16 192 Insert Song Edit ENEE 147 Internal Song List aniisi ieiet ereere 214 TIA A O AER A EE Ee 57 65 Intro Ending button s ssssssssssssssessssisssissssnesieseessesses 65 K Karaoken EE e 53 LE 91 Key TOU coe ciate ere oan eirercocens eee ested Stee ere 161 L Language ninme e E 170 Layer eeo an raS A A E S 31 WAVER LONE E ege Eelere 31 LCD Contrast Kn0b een 16 Leading bass EE 168 Local Control eier dt Egel Ee kee 190 Loop Recordmg ee 141 Lower Tone vs eier Seene e 71 EC e 26 90 182 M Main Output Jacks ue 16 192
12. 5 When you have finished with the name press the Exit button Determining the Save Destination 6 Touch lt Media gt gt to select the save destination strage media 7 Touch lt File gt d to select the save destination User Program number If a User Program set name is displayed a User Program set saved to that number is already If you select a number with previously saved User Program set data then save a new set of data to that same number the older User Program set will be deleted If you don t want to lose any previously saved User Programs select a number in the save destination column that does not yet have a name Saving 8 Touch lt Execute gt to begin the save Press the Exit button to return to the User Program File screen Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable gt When clearing the set of saved User Programs refer to Deleting Saved User Program Sets p 133 132 E Loading Saved User Program Sets User Programs that have been saved on external memories or in user memory can be called up on an individual set basis to the User Program button Note that calling up these User Programs results in the deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the User Program button When loading a set of U
13. Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the MEMD marker Markers can also be assigned in units of beats rather than 5 e Inthe same way touch the Marker B lt gt to set Marker B measures Refer to Placing a Marker in the Middle of a It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A Measure p 164 E Playback from a Marker Location 1 e Atthe marker screen touch the measure number of the marker you want to go to 2 141 M Sonate No 15 4 4 H D gt _E p C J Repeat a D fet lt gt feel I gt Clear Clear v 404dby5 Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set When you play the song playback starts from the position of the marker With the song playing back playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker B on the Marker screen E Erasing a Marker 1 e Touch lt Clear gt for the marker you want to erase 4141 M Sonate No 15 4 4 he 5 gt gegen Wewer gt r Repeat oe The marker disappears and the on screen display changes to lt gt 99 Chapter 4 Practice Functions E Moving a Marker You can move a marker that has been placed in a song You can also move the section of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back without changing the number of measures of marked 1 e On the Marker
14. Morning Lite o Jazzy Vib Gt N Ki Honky tonk N Kei Rock Piano N N Stage EP N wo Stage Phazer N A Vibrations N a Celesta N o Marimba N Nl Xylophone N NaturalC Hps N o Clav wo Music Box wo Glockenspiel i N SuperiorGrd2 Ki wo Natural Gnd2 wo A NaturalMello wo a Piano Str2 no o Grand Pianol wo NX Grand Piano2 no MellowPiano1 Fa o PianoStrings A Ki Bright Piano A DetunedPiano A N Honky tonk 2 A wo MellowPiano2 A A Piano Oohs A a PianoKidsCho A o Air Grand A N Ballad Piano A UprightPiano A o Mono Piano a Ki FM SA EP ol MIDI Pianol a N EG E Piano 1 go wo EG E Piano 2 a A Bell Piano a a E Grand a o Mild E Grand oa N Soft E Piano a Phase EP a o E Piano 1 kd Ki Pop H Piano O Tremolo EP Q N est Piano kd wo E Piano 2 kd A EP Phase box a St FM EP 202 66 EP Legend 67 Harpsichord 68 Coupled Hps 69 Harpsichord2 70 Comp Clav 71 Reso Clav 72 Phase Clav 73 Pulse Clav 74 Celesta 2 75 Soft Mari
15. p J138G sSonate No 15 4 4 l 120 D 1 Sonate No 15 i 2 2 Liebestraume 3 A Etude op 10 3 4 Je te veux 5 Valse op 64 1 Classical l d gt gt N Rom Favorites File fe 2 Touch the song name to select the song to be registered Registering to Favorites 3 Touch lt Favorites gt A screen like the one shown below appears This vill be registered to Favorites No 1 NOTE Are you sure You cannot register audio files i Cancel CK and audio CD to the Favorites 4 Touch lt OK gt The selected song is registered to Favorites Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the Song Selection screen 82 Chapter 3 Song Playback E Removing Songs From Favorites This deletes registered songs for Favorites 1 e Touch lt gt lt fe gt in the Song Selection screen to select the Favorites from the genre category 27138 8Sonate No 15 AAA RI B I Sonate No 15 2 Etude op 10 3 3 Arabesque a Favorites A gt Te PS Ra Piee Fie op 2 Touch the name of the song to be deleted 3 Touch lt Delete gt A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete Song Are you sure Sa 4 Touch lt OK gt The song is deleted 83 Chapter 3 Song Playback Using the Remote Control You can use the included remote control to easily start and stop performances and switch songs Ka Refer t
16. Recording return to the usual replace recording mode Press the Exit button to return to The Composer Menu screen E Re Recording Part of Your 3 Performance Punch in Recording You can re record part of a passage as you listen to a Begin recording Begin recording using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 110 or Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 136 recorded performance This recording method is called Punch in Recording This convenient function lets you record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a prerecorded performance in another section Up until the specified passage the previously recorded User Punch In Recording by the following two methods performance plays back Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B When you reach the specified passage sounds are erased Auto Punch In Out as recording starts begin playing now D Q a H VI Before you start recording place markers A and B to define the passage you want to re record Make the setting for punch in recording and re record just the passage between markers A and B When you reach the end of the specified passage recording stops and the KR returns to playback of the previously recorded performance When you press the gt m Play Stop button the Recording From the Point at Which t
17. Selecting the Images to be Displayed First take an external memory to which the image data stored in the KR has been saved and connect the external memory to the external memory port 2 Touch lt File gt A screen like the one shown below appears Chapter 10 Various Settings Load User Image O 1 KR107001 BMP 2 KR107002 BMP 3 KRI07003 6MP 4 BMPCP004 BMP D BMPCP005 BMP Is Media External Menoru lt P gt Previev Save 3 Touch the name of the stored image data When you touch lt Preview gt you can then show the selected image data on the display selected in Step 1 4 Touch lt Save gt The selected image data is stored 5 Press the Exit button to return to the previous screen To clear the stored image data touch lt Erase gt O Image data that KR can display EE 320 x 240 pixels for KR display ded 640 x 480 pixels for external display Format BMP format JPEG format Extension bmp jpg E Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On Opening Message You can modify this screen to show your favorite phrase when the power is turned on At Step 3 in Procedure p 165 touch lt Opening Message gt A screen like the one shown below appears E t ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO P KJ k a f Ins f Dei POR STU UD Yz lA a 0 All Clear Execute When you touch the character icon the character is input where at the
18. Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll through the screen and display other name of User Programs Touch the page icons D E to change pages Touch the name of the User Program you want to call up When you touch the name of the User Program the buttons or other performance settings instantly change to the previously saved settings E Changing the Way User Programs Are Called Up When calling up User Programs by touching program names in the User Program screen you can select different types of settings depending on how long you touch the touch panel 1 Press the User Program button 2 Press the Option button A settings screen like the following appears UPG Option All settinos in the user program are changed by GSE Touching the screen brieflu Touch briefly and only non Pelayed Arranger settings are changed Gia Touch for several seconds and all settings are changed 3 Touch lt Instant gt or lt Delayed gt to select the setting Display Explanation Immediately after a User Program name is Instant touched the Automatic Accompaniment settings also switch When you continue to touch the User Program name for a few moments the Automatic Accompaniment settings are switched Delayed 4 Press the Exit button to return to the User Program screen For further information about the content stored in the User Programs refer to p
19. gt lt gt to select the storage media to which the accompaniment Style is saved The names of the accompaniment styles stored on the selected storage media are displayed 4 Select a Music Style and touch the Music Style name 5 e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button You can save multiple user You can now perform in the selected Music Style pty ee to user memor T akea look at Saving a User Style Music Styles selected from external memories are stored until the power is turned p 158 off Even after ejecting the external memory by pressing the Music Style User button you can perform using the most recently selected Music Style 63 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles 1 e Select a Music Style p 61 Some Music Styles do not 2 e Press the One Touch Program Piano button include rhythm patterns When you select these Style The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played patterns no rhythm patterns 3 e Press the Intro Ending button are played even when you 1 the left side of th The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins starting from the Intro A Em 8 SCHER eyboard Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment you can add intros and endings by pressing the Intro Ending button and make changes to the rhythm patterns with
20. stands for Program Change which is a command that tells an instrument to change the sound it s using With songs that rely on the use of a variety of sounds a PC needs to be located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be changed Some edits can t be undone not even by choosing Undo We recommend saving songs to external memories or to user memory before editing For more on how to save songs refer to Saving Songs p 116 Editing 4 Touch the item to be edited 5 Set the value with the dial To cancel the operation once it is underway press the Exit button 6 When you re done making all the settings touch lt Execute gt When you are finished editing the setting return to the Song Edit screen Press the Exit button to return to The Composer Menu screen e You can play back edited songs by pressing the m Play Stop button in the Song Edit screen E Undoing Edits Undo You can cancel an editing operation that vou ve just carried out This is handy when you want to undo an edit and restore data to the way it was before There are some edits that can t be restored At Step 3 of Selecting the Editing Function p 145 select lt Undo gt FREI Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen You are undoing the last editing Copy Cancel OK If you touch lt Cancel gt the undo is cancelled and you re
21. 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND MX MUSIC SP Z O O UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Roland Iberia S L Portugal Office Cais das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 Porto PORTUGAL TEL 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek Dorozhnaya ul 3 korp 6 117 545 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 981 4967 SPAIN Roland Iberia S L Paseo Garcia Faria 33 35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 493 91 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 17 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 022 66 9426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Hali
22. 146 to create as many copies of the four measures as you need to complete your Rhythm part 1 Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the passage you want to record Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 98 If you haven t recorded anything yet then use Blank Recording to create the necessary number of measures before placing the markers What is Blank Recording Blank Recording is recording a number of silent measures with no content 1 Set the basic tempo and beat of the song 2 Hold down the Rec button and press the 2 m Play Stop button The indicators for the Rec and gt m Play Stop buttons both light up then after two measures of the count sound recording begins Without performing anything record only the required number of measures then press the gt m Play Stop button The indicators for the Rec and m Play Stop buttons both go out and recording stops In the Rec Mode screen p 140 select lt Loop gt Press the Exit button to return to The Composer Menu screen The recording method changes to loop recording Press the Rec button Press the Track button for the track to be recorded The KR is put in recording standby Press the gt Play Stop button to begin recording Recording starts from Marker A When the song reaches Marker B it then returns to
23. March 6 CntryBallad2 6 GospelShuffl 6 Slow Waltz 7 CountrySwing 7 ContPraise 1 7 Fast Waltz 8 Rock n Fever 8 ContPraise 2 8 Paris 9 Country Beat 9 Gospel 9 Quiet Waltz 20 Slow Country 0 Samba 20 Holiday 2 21 CountryRock2 1 ModernChaCha 21 Holiday 3 22 CountryFox 1 2 Salsa 22 2 Beat 23 Blues 2 Soft Gospel 23 Lager Polka 24 R amp B 4 Gospel Shout 24 Slow Polka 25 Slow Dance 5 AcoustRhumba 25 AustrianPolk 26 Twist 6 Acoust Samba 26 AustrianWalz 27 60s Beach 7 Trad Rhumba 27 Irish 28 Slow Oldies 8 Gospel Pop 28 Tejano 29 Early Rock 9 GospelBallad 29 Celtic 30 Go Go Rock 20 Latin Dance 30 Musette 31 Mersey Beat 21 Cha Cha 31 Scotland 32 CountryPop 2 22 Trad Tango 32 Japan 33 Cajun 23 SunshineBosa 33 Ireland 34 Country 24 Jazz Bossa 34 Paso Doble 35 Cntry Dreams 25 Merengue 35 China Pop 36 Charleston 26 GuitarRhumba 36 Jiang Nan 37 Bluegrass 27 Mambo 37 Xi Bei 38 Deep Country 28 Fast Samba 38 SchlagerBeat 29 Fast Bossa 39 PartySchlagr 30 Big Samba A0 70sSchlager ol Luv Bossa 41 Disco Fox Big Band 32 Mid Bossa 42 Party Polka Swing 33 Latin Pop 2 43 RockSchlager 34 Reggae 44 ShufflSchlgr i MidnitSloSwg 35 Tango 45 SimpleMarchi 7 BigBand Slow 36 Beguine 46 SimpleMarch2 3 Big Band 37 Oye Son 47 Simple Waltz S 38 Revival 48 Kids 4 4 4 BigBand Med z 5 BigBand Fast 39 Gospel Piano 49 Kaag 6 8 40 Asian Rhu
24. Moving Key button is pressed the piano player function is switched on or off Each time the FUNC 1 or FUNC 2 button is pressed switch the color used for lyric in the external display Lyric Color Pressing the button while the song is playing back stops the playback When you release the button playback resumes from the beginning of the measure being Replay played when you pressed the button Pressing the button a number of times in rapid succession moves the playback position back by the same the number of measures after which playback resumes Chapter 10 Various Settings Display Explanation Each time the FUNC 1 or FUNC 2 Track 3 button is pressed the lower track is switched on or off When turned off the sound from the lower track does not play Each time the FUNC 1 or FUNC 2 Track 4 button is pressed the upper track is switched on or off When turned off the sound from the upper track does not play Zoom Displays an enlarged notation Repeat Playback repeats within the marked range CD Eject Opens and shuts the CD drive Load Ir Serial port Only with The setting alternately switches to the models infrared or serial port each time the button featuring CD is pressed Drive 2 Press the Exit button to return to the Functions screen Changing the a PLAY Button Functions 1 Touch lt PLAY gt Li to assign funct
25. Record the performance using the procedures described in Chapter 4 p 104 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 136 Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs E Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds Mix Recording You can record a performance layered over a previously recorded performance This method is called Mix Recording 1 In the Rec Mode screen select lt Mix gt Press the Exit button to return to The Composer Menu screen The KR is set to the mix recording mode Record the performance using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 110 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 136 or other methods After you have finished with mix recording return to the usual replace recording mode E Repeated Recording at the Same Location Loop Recording You can record a specified passage over and over layering sounds with each pass This method is called Loop Recording This is handy when recording a Rhythm Part For example use this method to make a Loop Recording of a four measure segment First record the bass drum the snare drum next then the hi hat and so on layering a different instrument onto the same four measures After you have finished recording the four measure rhythm pattern you can then use the procedure in Copying Measures Copy p
26. gt Play Stop button and pressing the BP Fwd button moves you to the end of the song Ka If there is recorded song data the Delete song screen appears OK to delete Sono fre you sure Cancel If it s okay to delete the song touch lt OK gt If you do not want to delete the song touch lt Cancel gt and either save the song to a external memory p 116 or register the song to the Favorites p 82 Ror When you select a song the measure number in the Basic screen is highlighted The performance data is being loaded while the indication is highlighted please wait a few moments for this to be completed When using markers to specify a section to be repeated p 101 you can rewind and fast forward only within the range between Marker A and Marker B Chapter 3 Song Playback E Listening to Songs on CDs Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Drive Cautions Handling CDs e Do not leave discs exposed to direct sunlight for extended periods e Handle CDs with your finger and thumb holding the disc by the center hole and outer rim Do not touch or scratch the disc s recording surface the green side Do not drop or stack discs e Do not place heavy objects on discs or subject them to strong impact e Do not affix stickers or other such materials on the label side Placing stickers on the disc may result in errors when data writing and scratch the disc e Use
27. 123 Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys A V sync When the transmission of the initial setup ends the following message appears A V Sync Output Start performance 5 e When the Start performance message appears start playing the KR When you cis play other scre n to change tones etc while Al Sune Dutout outputting data press Menu button once again to display e the A V Sync screen then T A KZ touch the lt A V Sync Output gt Nov transmitting performance data When the performance is finished touch the button below 6 When you have finished the performance touch lt Stop Output gt Se D I a 5 V 7 e Stop recording with the connected device When you touch the lt Stop Output gt a screen like the one shown below appears BS A U Sync Output Output is finished Stop recording with the recording device Begin Next Press the Exit button to exit the A V sync function When you record other song touch the lt Begin Next Recording gt then repeat the procedure from Step 3 When you hear the performance recorded to the connected equipment touch the lt Listen to This Recording gt 124 Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys A V sync A screen like the one shown below appears A U Sync Output To listen to the recordino connect the output of the recording device to the KR s AUX
28. 216 At step 3 in Procedure p 165 touch lt Memory Backup gt A screen like the one shown below appears Memory Backup Stores settings in internal memory OL423d_y gt Execute Touch lt Execute gt The confirmation message appears on screen Touch lt OK gt to store the setting When the setting has been stored in memory the previous screen will reappear 171 Chapter 10 Various Settings Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable E Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset You can return the content stored with Memory Backup p 171 and the User Programs p 129 to their original factory settings This operation is referred to as Factory Reset When you perform a Factory Reset all settings that have been stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their factory defaults gt This operation does not return the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory condition To return the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings refer to Returning the Touch Screen Calibration Settings to the Original Factory Settings p 175 gt When you want to restore the content registered to the KR s User memory to the factory condition refer to Formatting the User Memory p 180 At step 3 in Procedure p 1
29. Acoustic Pop 5 Live Pop 6 Love Ballad 7 6 8 Ballad 8 Love Beat 9 UnplugShuffl 20 CoolLiveBand 21 Night Ballad 22 GuitarShuffl 23 Euro Ballad 24 Guitar Trio 25 Midnight Bld 26 Pop Ballad 27 Piano Pop 28 Love Songs 29 12 8 Ballad 30 Scat Ballad 31 60s Ballad 32 Torch Song 1 33 Torch Song 2 34 Strings 35 8BeatBallad1 36 8BeatBallad2 37 Fireside 38 Piano Ballad 39 Story Ballad 40 SimpleBallad 41 ClassicBalad 42 Symph Ballad 43 R 8 Beat 1 44 R 8 Beat 2 45 R 16 Beat 1 46 R 16 Beat 2 47 R 16 Beat 3 48 R 16 Beat 4 49 R Afro amp Swing 50 R 5BeatSwing 51 R Shuffle 52 R Waltz 53 R March 54 R 5 Beat 55 R 7 Beat 56 P Pop1 57 P Classic 1 58 P Night 59 P Bossa Nova 60 P Ragtime 61 P Classic 2 62 P Ballad 2 63 P Swing Pop 64 P Rock nRoll 65 P Concerto 1 66 P Concerto 2 67 P Swing 68 P Shuffle 69 P Boogie 70 P 50s Rock 71 P Latin Pop Rock 1 80s Rock 2 Idol Ballad 3 Pop 4 80s Pop 1 5 Funky Disco 6 AdultContemp 7 Uptown Rock 8 80sRetroDsco 9 UK Rock 21st 0 Barry Dance 1 Soft Rock 2 EZ Listening 3 Strumin Away 4 70s Disco 1 5 SmoothContmp 6 Simple Rock 7 60s Feelin 8 16Beat Pop 9 Light Pop 20 Bright Pop 21 Heart Beat 22 Easy Pop 23 80s Pop 2 24 80s Pop 3 25 Cute Pop 26 LovelyShuffl 27 70s Disco 2 28 70s Dance 29 Fever Dance 30 Euro Dance 31 Hard Tekno 32 Big House 33 90s House 34 Hou
30. EIERE E E 65 223 T Tap Tempo seeiis ieis eeii eree 94 LOL OVISION EE 186 RR EE 166 Jeer seit 55 64 94 Tempo buttons NEE 94 Tempo Mute ee 95 Tempo Recording ee 151 LONE E EE 28 Tome TSE seesacicsssecesestesdicieilainevessavtesvefeestiesecstasvesiiuveons 202 Tone eebe ege 30 TONE Set Arndt et Ee Egeter 138 Topsip e Scheed 18 Re E 18 Touch Sereen mioaa eiea 25 175 Touch the Note een 88 Track ASSIST ansete aein etei deires daneas nea iie 183 Track Buttons geesde ee aeie 97 106 108 Transformer eideler dee 48 BK EE 102 Transpose Song Ed 148 Transpose button oo c cece eesecceeteeecseeneseeceees 102 Troubleshooting eene 197 SAMMUT E 166 TUNING CULVE sii issos reisiin eiaei iesire sat 166 Tx Chanel semoene irer eee tk abies 190 U Undo Song Edit NENNEN 145 kee 31 USB Connector Eeer 16 USB Driver oversete dirent ern Ra EEEIEE 196 User Functions En 167 User Image Display oieee sii iipit iied eetNhs 170 User Memory ccccccssseceseeneneneneneseeneneneneseeeneneees 158 Formatting eeeieggeeeeeE ereE Ee iaer erii ee 180 User Program REENEN 130 Calling Wp geegent Bis deed 131 COPYING oes cesses eer de ce 133 Deleting os estates Metis fatten Mica adores 133 Loading eostig eio eitea e epa e 132 FAE aT oT E See See eehe deiere 130 DAVIE gege EET 131 Transmitting PC Numbers cccccceeeeeeeeteeees 135 LOE Style E E EEA 63 153 COPYING iaeoe neee ripe ea aa eae SeA 160 Deleting surent trieska teni
31. Favorites 82 Removing Songs From Favorites 83 Using the Remote Control 84 How to Use the Remote Control 84 About the Remote Control 85 Chapter 4 Practice Functions 87 Displaying the Notation e 87 Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds Touch the Notes 88 Scrolling the Notation Along with the Performances AutoSync DieiGeore 88 Making Detailed Settings for the Notation Lepage degen 89 Saving Notations as Image Data 92 Adjusting the Tempo ss ss sssssessssssesssrrtssstestessseestess 94 Contents Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time Tap Tempo siisii 94 Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo Tempo Mute sisanne 95 Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing Count EE 96 Muting Some Parts Before Playing Track Buttons 97 Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker EEN 98 Placing a Marker within a Song se ss sesssss1 98 Playback from a Marker Location 99 Erasing a Market 99 Moving a Marker ss ssasssssssssesessssesresssernresteessreses 100 Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Eet ee 101 Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back Transpose 102 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance cccsscessseeeeeeeees 104 Recording a New Song New Song en 105 Recording With Accompaniment en 107 Recording Along with a Dong 109 Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordimngsl een 110 Erasing Recorded Dertormancesg en 111 Erasing the Performance
32. Nocturne No 2 20 To The Spring 17 Valse op 64 1 21 Valse op 64 2 18 Prelude op 28 15 7 22 Radetzky Marsch 19 Traumerei 23 Traumerei 20 Turkischer Marsch Mozart 24 Moments Musicaux 3 21 Ungarische Tanze 5 25 Prelude op 28 15 22 O sole Mio 7 26 Harmonious Blacksmith 23 La Primavera 27 Ungarische Tanze 5 24 Trepak 28 Turkischer Marsch Beethoven 25 Canon Pachelbel 29 Nocturne No 2 26 Ombra maifu Internal Song List Classical 30 Fruhlingslied 31 Praludium 32 Jagerlied 33 Menuet Antique 34 Fur Elise 35 Turkischer Marsch Mozart 36 Standchen 37 Humoreske 38 Blumenlied 39 Alpenglockchen 40 Menuett G dur Beethoven 41 Venezianisches Gondellied 42 Alpenabendrote 43 Farewell to the Piano 44 Brautchor 45 Battle of Waterloo 46 Wiener Marsch 47 Le Coucou 48 Menuett G dur Bach 49 Spinnerlied 50 Gavotte 51 Heidenroslein 52 Zigeuner Tanz 53 La Cinquantaine 54 Csikos Post 55 Dolly s Dreaming Awakening 56 La Violette 57 Frohlicher Landmann 58 Sonatine op 36 1 Clementi 59 Sonatine op 20 1 Kuhlau 60 Sonatine No 5 Beethoven Practice
33. P 164 settings screen without cancelling the count 96 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Muting Some Parts Before Playing Track Buttons With commercially available music files for piano lessons the part for each hand can be played back independently This makes it easy to practice hands separately For example you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same right hand part be played or you can practice the left hand part while the right hand part plays A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below Bass Rhythm Whole Accomp Lower Upper SOOSS Accom Left hand Right hand paniment Part Part Drums SFX By using these Track buttons you can eliminate the sound of specific parts This is referred to as muting By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion you can mute parts the same way For details refer to Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 110 1 e Select the song that you wish to play back p 75 Selecting the Part that You ll be Playing 2 e Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button s indicator light or flash go dark The sound for the selected part no longer plays For example when practicing the right hand press the 4 Upper button When you play back the song the right hand performance will not sound Practice your rig
34. Pedal EX1 selected increases the layer Tone volume The layer If a song is stopped with the notation Tone is played at a fixed volume regardless of Page shown in the external display the notation how forcefully the keys are played Bwd 2 in the external display scrolls to the preceding page when you press the pedal Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX2 selected increases the layer Tone volume while the Punch In Out During Punch in Recording this starts and EX2 volume of the right hand Tone is decreased stops recording p 142 The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume z You can set the tempo according to the regardless of how forcefully the keys are eer interval at which the pedal or pad is played pressed p 95 EX3 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX3 selected increases the layer Tone volume What is the leading bass function Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX4 selected The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord EX4 increases the layer Tone volume while the as the bass tone is called Leading Bass When this function volume of the right hand Tone is decreased is turned on the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions are used Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal the bass tone if Pedal EX1 4 is assigned to more than one pedal gt Using the Bend Up or Bend Down function during a
35. TONE HARMONY and TRANSFORM Settings Adding Effects to Mic Vocals Selecting the Tone for the Left Hand and Right Hand Tracks Turning the Advanced 3D Function or tha surround function On and Off O Switching the Screen of the External Display Selecting the Song Genre Starting and Stopping Songs Q Selecting Previous and Following Songs VOL 0 Muting the Sound HL Z O Changing the Volume Using the Function 11 Changing the Tempo of 5 Assigned to the _TEMPO_ the Song and Automatic Buttons Accompaniment Transposing Sounds from the Keyboard and Roland Songs Being Played Back You can also switch the functions for the m Play Stop button the FUNC 1 FUNC 2 button the TEMPO button and the TRANSPOSE button Please refer to Changing the Functions of the Remote Control s Buttons p 172 85 Chapter 3 Song Playback __ Button Explanation TRANSFORM This changes the vocals from the mic The setting switches each time you press the button cycling through male female Kids and normal voice settings 1 This adds harmonies to the mic vocals HARMONY The harmony setting switches each time you press the button cycling through Music Files p 52 Oct Up p 49 Oct Down p 49 and normal voice settings This adds greater breadth to the sound 2 3D P
36. s SMF format is also composed of sixteen parts By loading the song file from the external memory and using the 16 Track Sequencer you can then also edit the song file gt Although with commercially available Roland SMF music data Part 11 is included in the 2 Bass Accomp track button other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons With some commercially available music files you cannot edit the data E The 16 Track Sequencer Screen When recording with 16 track Sequencer display the 16 track Sequencer screen 1 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears A U Sync Rec Mode MovinoKey Conposer Menu ET TA 16tr Sequencer Song Edit Chord Sequencer Style Composer Style Converter Beat Map Conposer Menu Play Mode Lyrics Composer MIDI Out LS ES H Track Assign C Rec Hode HovinoKeu L 2 Touch L L to switch the page then touch lt 16trk Sequencer gt A 16 track Sequencer screen like the one shown below appears Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs 27148 TE Superior Grd 2 4 Mh 14 f Solo Mute f Clear Tone Set Display Function Solo Only the selected Part is played back M Toggles playback of the selected Part to on ute or off The performance data for the selected part is Clear deleted Icon Explanation Touch to select the part to be recorde
37. the Performance Pad or the Rec button again and the previously recorded performance is played back When you press the gt m Play Stop button the performance stops When you re finished with Punch In Recording return to the ordinary Replace Recording mode Take a look at Changing the Recording Method p 140 Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords Chord Sequencer You can enter a chord progression and choose the places where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an accompaniment for a song This feature is called Chord Sequencer Thanks to the chord sequencer you can create an accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your right hand 1 Press the Menu button and watch the indicator light up The Composer Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt L gt lt L gt to switch the page then touch lt Chord Sequencer gt The screen like the one shown below is called Chord Sequencer screen This is the cursor The cursor shows where the chord change or other information is input This is the end of the song When continuing to add input insert measures by touching lt Ins gt Chords C Original Divisior S 0rch Full fau Clear f Clear Execute This indicates the position where the accompaniment pattern Division or the Style Orchestrator changes g 4a dpy gt Display Explanation One measure is inse
38. the Fill In button p 68 Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo 0 0 00 When the Basic screen is displayed you can use the Tempo buttons or the dial to change the tempo The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen Pressing the Tempo buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song to the basic tempo You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the accompaniment is playing 64 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment Pressing the One Touch Program Arranger button activates Sync Start for the accompaniment which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on the lower section of the keyboard and automatically sets an appropriate intro for the accompaniment You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and stops 560000 o 60066 COAG EE EE Cri or E Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You Play the Keyboard Sync Start MEMD 1 e Press the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button simultaneously Sync Start is set immediately causing the indicators of both buttons to flash after the One Touch Program Arranger button is pressed The Sync Start settings go into effect l ger P 2 Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard As you play the keys the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously O Changing the In
39. the same portion of all parts is deleted E Inserting Blank Measures Insert You can add a blank measure at a location you specify This addition of a blank measure is called insertion Ex To insert measures bars 5 7 At Step 3 of Selecting the Editing Function p 145 select lt Insert gt A screen like the one shown below appears Insert HK From All Tr Pt Item Content Measure number of the first measure of the From segment to be inserted For Number of measures to be inserted Track button or part number where data will be inserted Tr Pt When All is selected blank measures are inserted at the same place in all parts 8 4ajdpy gt 147 D o H H VI Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs E Transposing Individual Parts Transpose You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually At Step 3 of Selecting the Editing Function p 145 select lt Transpose gt A screen like the one shown below appears Transpose d IR Bias Execute Item Content Measure number of the first measure of the From segment to be transposed For Number of measures to be transposed Track button or part number to be transposed Tr Pt When All is selected the same portion of all parts is transposed The range of transposition Bias You can select the range to tran
40. 64 Is the 16 track Sequencer screen displayed p 136 There is a slight delay before playback of a song on external memory starts There are two types of SMF music files format 0 and format 1 If the song uses SMF format 1 data there will be a slight delay until playback starts Refer to the booklet that came with the music files you re using to determine the format type 199 s 2 pu ddy KA Q 4 K E 0 a a lt Troubleshooting Case Cause Remedy Case Cause Remedy KR operation is sluggish when external memory is connected Is lt Mode gt in the External Display Setting set to Slide Show p 186 If the connected external memory contains data to be used in a slide show the slide show will begin automatically Set lt Mode gt in the External Display Setting to a value other than Slide Show Can t record Lyrics are not indicated properly in the display With some music files the lyrics cannot be displayed correctly If you press a button while the lyrics are being shown in the display the lyrics will disappear To recall them touch lt Lyrics gt in the Piano or Basic screen or press the gt Play Stop button In the notation screen some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen and not be displayed Can t record Has one of the track buttons for rec
41. 8 4a dpy gt Marker A where recording continues Each time the recording is looped the newest sounds are layered over previously recorded sounds When you press the gt Play Stop button recording stops After you have finished with loop recording return to the usual replace recording mode p 140 141 Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs O Recording a Passage Specified by Markers 1 Before you start re recording place markers A and B to Loop Recording Shortcut You can also use the method described below to set Loop define the passage Recording Following the procedures described in Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 98 use Markers A and B to specify the passage 1 Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the passage you want to record 2 Inthe Rec Mode screen p 140 select lt Auto Punch In Out gt Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 98 If you haven t recorded anything yet then perform Blank Recording for the necessary number of measures before placing the markers Auto Punch In Out Touch the lt Repeat gt icon in the Marker screen p 99 DP This sets the loop recording mode Rec Stop Start a recording After you have finished with loop recording touch the ey This ch th di de to Punch I lt Repeat gt icon in the Marker screen once more to Via ey Pa rn re ae ewig ee
42. 9 Creating Music Styles If you want to hear the muted out Part touch lt Mute gt again To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds intro ending or fill in touch lt Mute gt immediately after switching to the Division O Editing the Volume and Effect Settings for Each Part Displaying the Part settings screen 1 At the Style Composer screen touch lt Part gt A screen like the one shown below appears Rhuthn Volune Reverb M Chorus M Panpot L ieee eie e Modifying the Settings of Each Part 2 Touch the lt Part gt L L to select the part with the settings to be changed The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper part of the screen You can also change the values by touching each parameter name and then using the dial Display Explanation Volume Adjusts the volume Reverb Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied to the sound Chorus Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied to the sound Changes the left right direction from which the sound appears to come Panpot When you touch the sound moves to the right touch H to move the sound to the left You can change the Tone for the selected Part by pressing a Tone button to change the Tone while this screen is displayed When selecting Rhythm Part you can touch lt Drum Set gt to select the drum set or effect sound or each parameter to chan
43. Be sure to save important songs to external memories or Favorites What are Favorites You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to Favorites allowing you to select these songs easily p 82 When you register a song on an external memory to Favorites you can then play back the song without connecting the external memory to the external memory connector If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites the performance won t be erased when the power is turned off Preparations for Saving Data 116 When saving to external memories connect the external memory to the external memory port Press the Song File button Touch lt File gt The Song File screen appears Touch lt Save gt The following Save Song screen appears d Le A teso oo on de Substitute the words floppy disk for external memory if using a separately purchased floppy disk drive Va When using a new storage media first initialize format the external memory on the KR Take a look at Formatting Media Format p 114 Some commercially available music files cannot be saved because they are copy protected de When saving to floppy disks first check to make sure that the floppy disk s protect tab is set to the Write position p 7 MEM If not handled with care a floppy disk and an external memory can be dam
44. Central No 3 Ens La Esperilla Santo Domingo Dominican Republic TEL 809 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil Ecuador TEL 593 4 2302364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34 01 zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL 502 599 2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S A de C V BO Paz Barahona 3 Ave 11 Calle S O San Pedro Sula Honduras TEL 504 553 2029 MARTINIQUE Musique amp Son Z 1 Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique EWL TEL 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique EWL TEL 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago 503 Managua Nicaragua TEL 505 277 2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima Peru TEL 511 4461388 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Ba
45. Chord Intelligence settings that are not used You Chord Intelligence is a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the can also change the rules moment you play a key governing how chords are played For more information To play a C chord for example you normally have to play the three keys C E and see Changing How Chords G But with Chord Intelligence you only have to press the C key to start a C chord Are Played and Specified accompaniment Arranger Config p 162 e Intelligence 1 Major Minor Ex C Ex Cm Play the root and For more information about chord fingering refer to the Seventh Minor Seventh Chord List p 212 Ex C7 Ex C m7 Play the root and Play the root MM the second key below it HMH the third key above it and the second key below it Major Seventh Diminished Ex C maj 7 Ex TEE Play the root and TITE Play the root and the first key below it ERETT the sixth key above it 59 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Viewing Chord Fingerings Chord Finder Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered you can display the notes of the chord on the screen K AA 1 e On the Basic screen touch lt Sia 2 Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about The chord fingering appears on screen WA Ma Me iil We Ma Ha Ma M Mi 5 aug GIG RETG Cdin mh Je WAN For example if you wanted to see the fingering
46. Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to External Memories 134 Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs 134 Selecting the Pedal Used for Switching Settings Pedal Shift ee 134 Sequential Loading of User Program Sets Stored Load NeXt repenre 134 Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting PC Numbers enee 135 Chapter 8 Creating and Editing SONGS rah tecnscnieaectniahhs ened 136 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track SOQUCNCEE E 136 The 16 Track Sequencer Screen 0cceeees 136 Modifying the Settings of Each Part 137 Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical Genre Tone Get 138 Recording a Performance ccceeeeseneees 139 Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode juara nee sninel din 140 Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording Replace Recording eccecese ce ceneeseseenenes 140 Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds Mix Recording 141 Repeated Recording at the Same Location Loop Recording e 141 Re Recording Part of Your Performance Punch in Recording e 142 Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords Chord Geouencer e 143 Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard EE 144 Editing SONGS enosn ee ee 145 Basic Operation of the Editing Functions 145 Undoing Edits Undo eee 145 Copying Measures Copy 146 12 Correcting Timing Discrepancies QUANTIZE ee eeeeeeeseeeseeeeceseecaceceeceenceseseesene
47. English 3 55 Chapter 1 Performance Displayed Explanation Displayed Explanation SE ng Dog and cat sounds Wood block F i IN he Triangle and castanet F Hand clap O Changing How the Metronome Beat Pattern Sounds You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals 1 e On the Metronome screen touch lt Pattern gt 2 Select the pattern with the dial Displayed Explanation Displayed Explanation Hormal Usual sound J Dotted half note intervals J Half note intervals d Dotted quarter note intervals Quarter note intervals D Dotted eighth note intervals D Eighth note intervals A Sixteenth note intervals Doubl Single back beat added TriFl Triplet rhythm added 5hufl Shuffle rhythm added O Turning Off the Beat Light Beat Indicator The beat light flashes in time with the metronome accompaniment Styles and song tempos but you can set it so that it stays off at all times 1 e Touch lt Beat LED gt in the Metronome screen 2 Select ON OFF Beat Indicator off with the dial 56 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment What is Automatic Accompaniment NEM For instructions on playing the Press the One Touch Program Arranger button for Automatic Accompaniment s Automatic Accompaniment optimum settings Automatic Accompaniment
48. For details refer to the owner s manual for your MIDI interface Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of the KR KR s Jack Panel Front MDI Phones MicVolume USB Expression Pedal ee Ga G o Aux input Hizom MIDI OUT f ft MIDIIN USB Connector of your Computer El es ESCH te h Bees USB MIDI Interface Computer E Connect to the USB Connector You can connect you computer with a USB cable to the USB connector located on the left underside of the KR and exchange MIDI data between the instrument and the computer You can use the KR to play SMF data created with the computer and exchange performance data in the same manner as with MIDI devices connected to the MIDI connectors Connecting your computer to the KR for the first time requires installation of the USB Driver on the included CD ROM to the computer The correct driver and the installation procedure will depend on your system and on the other programs you are using Be sure to read the Readme file on the CD ROM before installation Windows XP 2000 W2kXP Readme_E htm Windows Me 98 98SE W98Me Readme_E htm Mac OS X gt Driver Mac OS X Readme_e htm Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always t
49. Jungle BD 2 Vox Dom 36 Pop Kick 1 Rock Kick 1 Jazz Kick 1 HipHop BD1 Vox Tuush HIE Por Side Stick Rock Side Stick Jazz Snare Swing 1 TR 808 Rimshot Vox Hehho 38 Pop Snare s 1 Rock Snare s 1 Jazz Snare 1 Power Snare 1A Vox Doyear EJ Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Jazz Snare Swing 2 TR 707 Clap Vox Thu 40 Pop Snare s 2 Rock Snare s 2 Jazz Snare 2 Power Snare 2A Vox That A Pop Low Tom f Rock Low Tom f Jazz Low Tom f Low Tom 2 Vox Aahhh E Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Rock CHH 1 EXC1 Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Vox Tu 43 Pop Low Tom Rock Low Tom Jazz Low Tom Low Tom 1 Vox Dooh ZI Pop CHH2 EXC1 Rock CHH 2 EXC1 Pop CHH2 EXC1 PedalHi hat3 EXC1 Vox Ptu 45 Pop Mid Tom f Rock Mid Tom f Jazz Mid Tom f Mid Tom 2 Vox Down _ Pop OHH EXC1 Rock OHH EXC1 Pop OHH EXC1 Pop OHH EXC1 Vox Pa Pop Mid Tom Rock Mid Tom Jazz Mid Tom Mid Tom 1 Vox Bom 48 Pop High Tom f Rock High Tom f Jazz High Tom f High Tom 2 Vox Toear E Pop Crash Cymbal 1 Rock Crash Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 3 Vox Aahhu 50 Pop High Tom Rock High Tom Jazz High Tom High Tom 1 Vox Toya E Pop Ride Cymbal 1 Rock Ride Cymbal 1 Jazz Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Vox Thu 52 Pop Chinees Cymbal Pop Chinees Cymbal Jazz Chinees Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Vox Cheey 53 Pop Ride Bell Pop Ride Bell Jazz Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Bell Vox Cymm EJ Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Shake Tambourine Vox Tub 55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Vox Pruru EJ Cha Cha CowBell Cha
50. KR sets of User Programs and other such data are stored You can also copy User Styles and sets of User Programs saved on external memories Data saved to the user memory is not deleted even when the KR s power is turned off gt When you want to clear all of the content saved to the user memory and restore the settings to the factory settings refer to Formatting the User Memory p 180 Preparations for Saving Data When saving to an external memory first connect an external memory to the external memory port 1 Press the Music Style User button A User Style screen like the following appears rchingBand 4 4 AXLI Marchinoband al g 2 Kids 5 Kids Dance 4 Holiday 1 5 Quiet Waltz fa fe fE To lll User Search If the User Style screen is not displayed touch lt User gt in the lower part of the screen 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Save gt 158 A Save Style screen like the following appears Save Style e A LEON External Menory ele 8 nn Determining the Name of the Style to be Saved 4 Touch lt Rename gt A Rename screen like the following appears When you touch h the cursor moves When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears at the cursor position For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C gt A Each
51. Melody Intelligence Choir Block Organ Do Band Combo Country Gospel 2 Select and touch a harmony type Then when you play a melody on the keyboard a harmony style is automatically MEMO added With some harmonies Tones When you press the Exit button you re returned to the previous screen while the may change automatically Melody Intelligence function remains selected Also when you play several keys at the same time in some 3 e Press the Melody Intelligence button once more and the indicator light cases harmony may be added to one note goes out The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled 70 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance Lower Tone Normally when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance sounds are not produced by playing the left hand part of the keyboard When you touch the lt Lower 1 gt or lt Lower 2 gt icon you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard play simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment 1 e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button This sets the Automatic Accompaniment 2 On the Basic screen touch lt Lower 1 gt Now when you play a chord in the left hand keyboard area the notes you play will sound and the accompaniment chord changes In the same manner you can play the lower tone by touching lt Lower 2 gt By touching both lt Lower 1 gt and lt Lower 2 gt you can get a Lay
52. Music Style For example if you select a time signature of 4 4 then count to four count to three when 3 4 time is selected The tempo is automatically set according to the interval between the counts as you speak into the microphone and the song or Arranger begins Press the Exit button to return to the Vocal Effects screen O Playing Instrument Sounds at Vocal Pitches Vocal Keyboard You can have melodies sung into the microphone played with the KR s internal Tones 1 e Touch lt Vocal Keyboard gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 47 Vocal Keyboard Strings Super Tenor AoE Rich Choir n A Guitar2 Flute OFF 2 If the lt OFF gt icon is selected touch the lt ON gt icon When you play the keys while using Vocal Keyboard the 3 e Touch any of the icons to select a Tone tone selected for Vocal Keyboard is played You can also select the Tone by pressing the Tone button When you sing into the microphone the sung pitches are played using the selected Tone Cancelling the Effect 4 Touch lt OFF gt The Vocal Keyboard function is cancelled Press the Exit button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen 51 Chapter 1 Performance O Adding Harmonies to a Specified Part Music Files When you sing while playing back a specified part from song data harmony is added based on pitches of the specified part Select the song to which you want to add harmony To select a song s
53. Part left hand GTA Piano Part right hand A 16 Track Sequencer and Track Buttons In addition to the 16 Track Sequencer function the Track Buttons p 97 are another of the unit s playing recording functions These five Track buttons are used for organizing the 16 Track Sequencer s sixteen parts This allows you to use the 16 Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances recorded with the Track buttons and make even more detailed edits of the songs You can easily play back the original song data with the 16 Track Sequencer mute parts by pressing the Track buttons and more You cannot use the Track buttons while the 16 Track Sequencer screen is displayed The Track buttons correspond to 16 track sequencer parts as shown below Track button Part R Rhythm D 10 S 11 1 Whole 1 2 Bass Accomp 2 5 9 12 16 3 Lower 3 4 Upper 4 Since the 16 Track Sequencer records one tone to one part you cannot use Layer performance p 31 Split performance p 32 or other such functions to record two or more tones simultaneously Also you can t record the performance with Automatic Accompaniment 136 When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment then you should use the Track buttons for recording Refer to Recording With Accompaniment p 107 Commercially Available Music Files Commercially available song file recorded in Roland
54. S S 0 Notation is displayed in the specified specified key key Item Setting User Pait User Track Selects the part to display when User is selected as the part Parts 1 16 to be displayed Lower Part Lower Track Selects the part to display when Lower is selected as the Parts 1 16 g part to be displayed Upper Part Selects the part to display when Upper is selected as the KA part to be displayed 91 y 401dpy gt Chapter 4 Practice Functions Item Setting Bouncing Ball On Displayed This setting determines whether or not the animated ball is shown bouncing in time with the off Not displayed song as it is played back Color Notation On The note is This settings determines whether or not the note in displayed in color the current position is colored Off Not displayed E Saving Notations as Image Data You can take notations that are displayed on the KR and save them to external memories You can also use saved image data to your computer Other than for your own personal enjoyment use of the q ke Q a ie lt V 1 e Insert the external memory onto which you want to save the image data notations that are output 7 r in the KR s external memory port qrithGuiihe permission ofthe 2 copyright holder is prohibited D Record the performance p 105 by law Alternatively press the Song button to select a song 3 Press the Digi
55. Series of Images on an External Display Slide Ghoww 178 Running a Slide Show of Images Stored on External Memory ccccceccseeeeenetesesestetenees 178 Changing Slide Shows sssssssssssssssssrtssssrstesseees 178 Setting the Image Display Duration 179 Selecting the Part to Which the Effect is Added E ffectsbart AAA 179 Formatting the User Memory ccseeseeeeees 180 Automatically Starting the Quick Tour 180 Adjusting the Piano Designer Resonance 181 Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance Panel Lock Au 181 Detailed Song Playback Settings e 182 Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs Play Mode 182 Viewing Song Information Information asenada aa 182 Hiding the Lyrics UL ates 182 Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback Track Assign sssrssrirarainicnnianiin ias 183 Chapter 11 Connecting External DEViC S aasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 1 OD Connecting an External Display or TelevisiON Zoe tech i nei 185 Connecting an External Display s se 112111 185 Contents Connecting a Television cccccccceeeieeees 186 Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display and the Television External Display cccccceeccesesceeeesesesnenenens 186 Explanation of Each Items 0 0 187 Connecting Video Equipment V LINK 187 Using the V LINK function ccceee
56. Simply connecting a cable is not enough for communication to take place The connected devices must be set to use the same MIDI channels Otherwise no sound will be produced and no sounds can be selected Select the transmit channel 1 16 of the KR The channel setting is at 1 when the KR is powered up If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections messages from the left hand section are fixed at 3 The KR receives messages on all channels from 1 through 16 E Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard Local Control When connecting a MIDI sequencer set Local Control to OFF The setting is at Local Control ON when the KR is powered up As illustrated information describing what has been played on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two different routes 1 and 2 As a result you hear overlapping or intermittent sounds To prevent this from happening route 1 must be disabled by setting the unit to what is known as Local Off 1 Local On i Sequencer i MIDI Sound IN Generator MIDI OUT SW 2 Soft Tru On Each note played is sounded twice 190 Local On The keyboard and internal sound generator are connected Sound is emitted t Sound Generator Local On f M Local Off The keyboard and internal sound generator are a separated No sound will be produce
57. Speakers to Produce Concert Hall Presence You can connect an amp and speakers to the KR and play the sounds of the reverb and accompaniment through the external speakers to produce the effect of being enveloped by an orchestra The KR is equipped with XLR connectors a very convenient feature when the instrument is used on stage How To Use This Manual The KR Owner s Manual consists of three volumes Quick Start Owner s Manual and the USB Install Guide Please start out by reading Before You Start Playing p 18 in the Owner s Manual this volume This explains how to connect the KR s power cord and how to turn on the instrument s power After turning on the KR s power please continue by reading Quick Start By trying out the various procedures while reading the Quick Start you can easily learn how to play the KR and make use of its major functions especially procedures that involve use of the main buttons The Owner s Manual describes procedures from basic operation to procedures for special applications for example using the KR as an accompanist and creating songs that will help you master the KR s many performance functions When connecting a computer to the USB port be sure to read the USB Install Guide This describes the procedure for installing the driver needed to connect via USB For more on system requirements refer to the USB Installation Guide However note that the KR is not compat
58. TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following 1 Read these instructions 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched 2 Keep these instructions particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the 3 Heed all warnings point where they exit from the apparatus 4 Follow all instructions 11 Only use attachments accessories specified 5 Do not use this apparatus near water by the manufacturer 6 Clean only with a dry cloth 12 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when 7 Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in unused for long periods of time accordance with the manufacturers instructions 13 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any heat registers stoves or other apparatus including way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid amplifiers that produce heat has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with not operate normally or has been dropped one wider than the other A grounding type pl
59. The Advanced 3D effect is eliminated and the effect is no longer applied to any of applied even when you touch the parts lt ON gt if all parts are turned off 40 Chapter 1 Performance E Selecting the tone to which the effect is applied 1 e Press the Surround Reverb button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt Surround gt to display the Surround screen 3 e Press the Option button 4 Touch L L to display the following screens Surround Option The effect is applied to all parts played on the keyboard Layer The effect is applied to Part layered part 5 e Touch the icon to select the value Parameter Display Explanation The effect is applied to all tones played with the All Parts keyboard the lower tone upper tone and layer tone Part The effect is applied only to the layer part When not using a layer performance p 31 the Layer Part Advanced 3D effect is not applied to the keyboard performance even if lt Keyboard gt on the Surround Option screen is set to On 6 When you press the Exit button you return to the Surround screen 41 Chapter 1 Performance E Making Detailed Settings for Advanced 3D 1 e Press the Surround Reverb button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt Surround gt to display the Surround screen 3 e Press the Option button 4 Touch L L to display the following screens Advanced 3D Opt
60. The Blues 11 One Down And Easy 12 A Prelude To 13 Bach s A Boppin 14 Kismet s Salsa 15 From Matthew s Passion 16 Roll Over Ludwig Kids 1 Grandfather s Clock 2 Old MacDonald Had A Farm 3 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star 4 Mary Had A Little Lamb 5 London Bridge 214 Kids EZ Classical 6 Jingle Bells 27 Sonata Haydn 7 Silent Night Holy Night 28 Italian Concerto 8 Joy To The World 9 Puppy s March Classical 10 Frog Song Song files of this genre corresponds to the included collection of printed music 11 Little Fox entitled Roland 60 Classical Piano M i 12 Lightly Row asterpieces 1 Sonate No 15 13 The Cuckoo 2 Liebestraume 3 3 Etude op 10 3 EZ Classical p g 4 Je te veux 1 La Fille Aux Cheveux De Lin 5 Valse op 64 1 2 La Campanell 6 Golliwog sCakewalk 3 Eine Kleine Nachtmusik f 7 Fantaisielmpromptu 4 Les patineurs Valse g 8 Arabesque 1 5 Divertimento 9 Blauen Donau 6 Impromptu Op 90 2 10 Auf Flugeln des Gesanges 7 Gnossienne 1 11 Mazurka No 5 8 Die Lorelei 12 G die 1 9 Brindisi ee 3 13 Etude op 25 1 10 Air sul G ee 14 Clair de Lune 11 Fantaisielmpromptu p 15 Etude op 10 5 12 Grande Valse Brillante 16 Dr GradusAdParnassum 13 Gymnopedie 1 17 Grande Valse Brillante 14 Liebestraume 3 18 La priere d une Vierge 15 Mondschein 19 Course en Troika 16
61. a felt tip marker or other soft tipped implement to write titles and other information on the label side of discs e Store discs in their original cases or other suitable cases for protection e Before using the CD please read the warning on the CD cover Cleaning Discs e Ifa disc becomes dusty or soiled gently wipe the disc with a soft cloth Always wipe outwards from the center using light gentle strokes Do not wipe the disk in a circular pattern Precautions Concerning Use of the CD e CD R RW discs to which audio tracks have been added and CDs with mixed audio tracks and data will not play back properly e The KR is capable of playing back only commercial CDs that conform the official standards those that carry the COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO logo The usability and sound quality of audio discs that incorporate copyright protection technology and other non standard CDs cannot be guaranteed e For more detailed information on audio discs featuring copyright protection technology and other non standard CDs please consult the disc vendor e You cannot save songs and styles to CDs and you cannot delete songs or styles recorded to CDs Furthermore you cannot format CDs e The prescribed format for CD R RW discs is ISO9660 Level 1 Mode 1 e You may be unable to read using other formats You may not be able to play CDs That Can Be Played Back back certain commercially e Commercially available audio CDs availabl
62. begins here Carry out Steps 1 4 on p 105 to prepare for recording If the Rec button s indicator is not lit press the Rec button so the indicator is lit The KR is put in recording standby 1 e Press the lt q Bwd button one time The measure number in the upper right of the Basic screen changes to PU and the KR is set to record a song starting with a pickup 5Pop NaturalGrand Start recording After a one measure count recording begins 112 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Using External Memories Va If you install separately available external memory or a floppy disk drive you ll be If connecting an optional able to save songs vou ve recorded and listen to commercially available music data floppy disk drive substitute floppy disk wherever the E Connecting and Ejecting an External Memory term external memory appears here 1 e Press the External Memory port cover and open the cover Press the cover in the cover will open Use external memory available from Roland Proper functioning cannot be guaranteed if other external memory products are used Carefully insert the an external memory all the way in until it is firmly in place 3 Press the cover in again to close the cover Always keep the Ext Memory port cover closed except when connecting and disconnecting external memory Locking the External Memory Port Cover W
63. berant sound is cut off before its natural length Humanizer Adds a vowel character to the sound making it similar to a human voice Overdrive gt Chorus This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in series Ring Modulator This is an effect that applies amplitude modulation AM to the input signal producing bell like sounds Overdrive gt Flanger This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in series Overdrive gt Delay This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in se ries Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo ef Distortion gt Chorus This effect connects an distortion and a chorus in series Distortion gt Flanger This effect connects an distortion and a flanger in series Distortion gt Delay This effect connects an distortion and a delay in se ries Tremolo fect to the sound Auto Pan Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound By applying successive cuts to the sound this effect Slicer turns a conventional sound into a sound that ap pears to be played as a backing phrase Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels Compressor 8 smoothing out fluctuations in volume Limiter Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level preventing distortion from occurring Stereo Chorus This is a stereo chorus Enhancer gt This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in se
64. dial to switch the mode to Auto This makes the setting for the Auto mode 5 Touch lt Chord Root gt and lt Chord Type gt then use the dial to input the chord root and type for the segment to be extracted 6 Touch lt Division gt then use the dial to select the Division Display Performance division Intro Intro Original Original accompaniment pattern em T 2 From the fill in to the variation Vari Variation Variation accompaniment pattern Fill To Ori From the fill in to the original Ending Ending Only one measure can be extracted when Fill To Vari or Fill To Ori is selected for the Division The number of measures may also be limited in other Divisions Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles 7 Touch lt From gt and lt For gt then use the dial to select the measures to be extracted Touching lt Play gt at the bottom of the screen you can listen to performance of the portion which you chose 8 Repeat Steps 5 7 to create Styles for all of the Divisions Tf no setting is made for a Division it uses a simple drum pattern Deciding on a Style 9 When you re done making all the Division settings touch lt Execute gt The User Style is recorded to the User button If you turn off the power or record a new User Style any User Style you ve previously recorded is lost If you do not want to delete the Style save it to an external memory or to user
65. extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share S Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page taken apart or thrown into fire or water Batteries must never be recharged heated S Ey audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional S level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result Do not put anything that contains water e g flower vases on this unit Also avoid the use of insecti cides perfumes alcohol nail polish spray cans etc near the unit Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry soft cloth CAUTION The unit should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper venti lation cord when plugging into or unplugging from an Always grasp only the plug on the power supply SQ outlet or this unit plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can re
66. for a C chord you would touch lt C gt then touch lt gt Press the Exit button to go back to the Basic screen 60 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Selecting Music Styles Music Style Buttons You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons Four different preset styles are assigned to the Music Style Balad Oldies BigBand Latin Acoustic Country Swing Gospel We OOGO 1 e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button For more on the Music Style names refer to the Music 2 Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group Style List KR117 p 210 Watch the indicator button light up Five of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen 80s Rock 2 Idol Ballad 5 Pop 4 80s Pop 1 Funky Disco Search This screen is called the Style Selection screen Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and display other styles Touch the page icons D D to change pages You can touch lt Search gt to find Styles that match the selected criteria p 62 3 Touch a Music Style name to select the Music Style You can use the dial to automatically switch pages and select Styles 4 Touch Preset lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt or lt D gt in the lower part of the screen When the Music Style is selected Preset A is selected When any of
67. for the Bifect ue 37 Selecting the Tone to Which the Effect is Applet ssvasctcinpinh derer cian aeons Eet 37 Changing the Amount of Surround Effect 38 Using the Internal Speakers to Add Three Dimensional Spatiality to the Accompaniment Sounds Advanced 3D ccsscsesccseeecseeeeneeseneeseneees 39 Selecting the Part for the Effect ue 40 Selecting the tone to which the effect is Applied ergeet dee 41 Making Detailed Settings for Advanced IR E 42 Adding Liveliness to the Sound Dynamic Emphasis seseo Zeene Ster enese iinei 43 Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality Equalizer ccccccceeceeeeestetetenees 44 Applying Effects to the Sound Effects 004 46 Adding Effects to Mic Vocals Vocal Effect 47 Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music EE 53 Using the Metronome ccccccccceseseenetesesestetenens 54 Using the Metronome 54 Changing the Metronome Settings 004 55 Chapter 2 Automatic ACCOMPANIMENT ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 Music Styles and Automatic Accompamtment EE 57 Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment One Touch Arranger ee 58 About Chords ezderiuee reegen 59 Playing Chords with Simple Fingering Chord Intellteence ee 59 Viewing Chord Fingerings Chord Fmder 11 60 Selecting Music Styles Music Style Buttons 61 Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles Style Search stees seth ee ENEE 62 Selecting Music Styles on External
68. in the User Program Saving Performance Settings User Program p 130 Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro gram name is touched when lt Option gt on the User Pro gram screen is set to Delayed Rotary effect Slow Fast Layer Tone Left hand Tone Organ Footage Upper Lower Percussion Selected Tone Octave Shift Right hand Tone Effect Type Control 1 Control 2 On Off The part to which the effect is added Bass Tone Chord Tone Parameters that switch after the User Program name is touched for a few moments when lt Option gt on the User Program screen is set to Delayed Music Style Tempo Part Balance Accompaniment Part Accompaniment On Off Chord Recognize Mode Leading Bass On Off Original Variation Arranger A Sync Start On Off Settings lt Accomp gt Setting for Arranger Configuration Style Orchestrator Division Part Balance Keyboard Parts Melody On Off Type Intelligent Lower 1 Lower 2 On Off for the Part Layer 1 Layer 2 On Off for the Part Keyboard Mode R y Keyboard Transpose Split Point Split On Off Functions Assigning to the Left Pedal and Center Pedal Pedal Settings Bend Range Functions Assigning to the Expression Pedal Performance Pad User Function User Program Settings Reverb On Off Type Depth On Off Echo Type Depth Vocal Effects Tra
69. ler senine an i eiieeii ae iara EEA 63 Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns 64 Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo 64 Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment 65 Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You Play the Keyboard Sync Start e 65 Stopping Automatic Accompaniment 66 Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro Countdown 67 Modifying an Accompaniment ss sessssssestsrss erst 68 Changing the Accompaniment Pattern Fill In Buttons 68 Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the E 69 Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles Style Orchestrator 0 0 69 Adding Harmony to the Right Hand Part Melody Intelligence ue 70 Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance Lower Tone ou cseseeeseeeeteeeeneees 71 Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added Piano Style Arranger ccccccceteseeceneesesesteenes 72 Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part Balance seccccecstee eset ein elie ese aids 73 Changing the Volume Balance Between the Accompaniment and the Keyboard Balance Knob AAA 73 Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance 73 Chapter 3 Song Playback 75 Playing a Gong EE 75 Listening to Songs on CDs Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Drive 77 Using Keywords to Search for Songs Song Search ccccccccseseseseeeeceseseseseeneesesesneenes 81 Registering the Songs You Like
70. part of the performance at the time the data was recorded may be altered Even with data saved with MT as the Tone compatibility format an exact reproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players Selecting the File Format when saving to external memories 1 O Touch lt File Format gt to select the file format Display Explanation Saves the song as an SMF Standard MIDI Files Songs saved in this SMF format can be listened to on many instruments that can play SMF music files p 217 A song recorded using commercial music files can t be saved in Save As SMF format for reasons of copyright protection SMF Saves the song in this unit s format You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP G R series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices This format is called i format i format 1 1 e Press the Exit button Save 1 2 Touch lt Execute gt to start saving 118 The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more Don t take the external memory out of the external memory port until the saving process is finished Press the Exit button to return to the Song File screen Depending on the playback instrument some notes may drop out or sound different Never turn off the power while the saving operation
71. performance space Display Explanation Hait Hall with bright reverberation Hall2 Hall with warm reverberation Room1 Room reverberation Cathedral High ceilinged cathedral Ground Wide open space with no reverberations Room2 Small room Lounge Larger room Studio A recording studio Gymnasium Ina gymnasium Hall3 Large concert hall reverberation Dome A domed ballpark Cave Adds the extended reverberations found inside a cave GS Room1 E EE GS Room3 Chapter 1 Performance Display Explanation GS Hall1 Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall Gives GS Hall2 reverberation with a greater sense of depth than GS Room Reproduces a plate echo reverberation created using the SSES vibrations of a metal plate A delayed sound that is added to the original similar to the GS Delay reflected sounds of mountain echoes GS Pan Delay The reflected sounds are panned shifted laterally MEMO No effect is applied when the 3 Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected slider is moved all the way to the left In this case the Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb and to the jet Se button s indicator won t light left for less up when you press the You can also move the slider with the dial Surround Reverb button When you press the Exit button the reverb effect is acti
72. recorded a message like the one shown below appears OK to delete Stule e Sa Touch lt Cancel gt to return to the Composer Menu screen Save User Styles to external memories or to user memory p 158 When you touch lt OK gt the previously recorded User Style is deleted and a new User Style is created A Style Composer screen like the one shown below appears 152 FE Pop All Clear Mute Clear Part Drum Set Execute Display Part R Rhythm B Bass A1 Accompaniment 1 A2 Accompaniment 2 A3 Accompaniment 3 A4 Accompaniment 4 A5 Accompaniment 5 A6 Accompaniment 6 Icon Function All Clear Deletes all of the settings You can mute the sound of particular Mute Parts in specific Divisions For more information take a look at Muting Parts for a Particular Division p 154 Clear Deletes the Styles in selected parts 154 Icon Function The Part Settings screen is displayed allowing you to make detailed settings Part to each part For more information take a look at Editing the Volume and Effect Settings for Each Part p 155 Records the created Style to the Music Style User button Touch this when you have finished creating the Style Execute Selecting the Styles Assigned to Each Part 4 Touch the part to be set 5 Press a Music Style button then select a Style with th
73. state only the grand piano sound can be 2 Press the Option button ER played A screen like the one shown below appears 1 Turn down the volume all the way Resonance Option 2 Press the Power switch to turn off the power Key Off 3 While holding down the Wonderland Game button press the Power switch and turn on the power Hold down the button for at least ten seconds until the animation is displayed DD allel DD All buttons except for piano play are disabled Adjust the volume When you play the keyboard the grand piano sound will be heard H of each item to make settings To undo the Panel Lock function turn the volume down to the minimum and turn on the power once again Item Explanation With an acoustic piano playing a note causes the strings for other keys already being pressed to resonate The function that reproduces this resonant sound is called String Resonance String When the damper pedal on an acoustic piano is pressed the sound of the key that is played causes other strings to resonate adding rich Damper reverberation and breadth to the sound This function reproduces the resonant sound created by pressing the damper pedal Damper Resonance This reproduces the key off sound the subtle sound made when the keys are released produced when playing an acoustic piano Key off ITU 181 Chapter 10 Various Settings
74. stop playback of the song then press the m_ Play Stop button E Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback Track Assign Normally when playing back Roland Piano Digital compatible SMFs p 217 the lower part is assigned to the 3 Lower button and the upper part is assigned to the 4 Upper button However assignment of the upper and lower parts may differ with some SMF data If you cannot get the upper and lower parts to work well set on Auto then change the setting to 2 1 Part or 3 4 Part gt This setting can be used with songs stored in external memory and on CDs and songs in SMF format The setting does not work with internal songs or songs registered to the Favorites 1 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears Touch L L to switch the screens 2 Touch lt Track Assign gt A screen like the one shown below appears o select the setting Display Explanation The part assigned to each track will be Auto determined automatically depending on the song data Part 1 will be assigned to the upper part 2 1 Part track part 2 to the lower part track and part 3 to the user track Part 4 will be assigned to the upper part 3 4 Part track part 3 to the lower part track and part 1 to the user track 4 Press the Exit button to return to The Composer Menu s
75. the Presets from lt A gt through lt D gt are selected the Music Style tempo Upper Tone Style Orchestrator settings p 69 and other settings change 5 e Press the Exit button The display returns to the Basic screen When you play a chord in the left hand part of the keyboard the selected Music Style is automatic 61 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles Style Search You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song musical genre or other criteria you set You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names 1 e Press one of the Music Style buttons 2 Touch lt Search gt The following Style Search screen appears Name Search screen Stule Search Specify initial letter of keyword to search then touch lt Search gt Condition Search screen Style Search Beat 4 4 Groove 8Beat Genre Pons A mo men ee Touch here to switch these screens Sg O Searching by Conditions 3 e Touch the parameter you want to set then use the dial to select the search conditions 4 Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style Press the Exit button to return to the Style Search screen O Searching by Music Style Name 3 Touch lt By Name gt Touch lt By Key gt to return to the Condition Search screen 4 Deci
76. the instrument when two simultaneous connections have been made a loud continuous beep tone may suddenly begin sounding You need to set Mode of the Aux input to Off Please disconnect whatever you have connected to Aux Out or Balanced Out when set to anything other than Off No sound is heard Has Local Control been set to Off When Local Control is set to Off no sound notes are sounded hen the keyboard X y is produced by playing the keyboard is played Set Local Control to On p 190 The maximum number of notes can play simultaneously is 128 Frequent use of the Not all played damper pedal during automatic accompaniment or when playing along with a song on external memory may result in performance data with too many notes causing some notes to drop out The Tone has changed During automatic accompaniment changing the Music Style automatically changes the Tones and tempo of the upper part of the keyboard to match the new Music Style If you want to change only the Music Style without also altering the tempo and Tone check out Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch Setting p 162 When a performance made along with a Music Files tune has been recorded recording the performance to button 1 Whole may make the Tones for buttons 3 Lower and 4 Upper change as well The sound is strange Sounds are heard twice doub
77. the playback down the pitch of the sound drops will resume backs up the same number of Glide temporarily returning to the original pitch measures as the number of times the pedal is when the pedal or Pad is released This can pressed E Ee eg eee the eee Upper The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal of instruments like a Hawaiian guitar Sostenuto p 22 Composer Performs the same function as the gt Upper Soft The pedal functions as a soft pedal p 22 Play Stop Play Stop button p 75 cower Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds If a song is stopped with the notation D in the left hand side of the keyboard during a Page shown in the KR display the notation in amper split performance Fwd 1 the KR display scrolls to the next page when vou press the pedal This raises the pitch of notes you play on the youp pedal Bend Up keyboard If a song is stopped with the notation Page shown in the KR display the notation in Bend This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the Bwd 1 the KR display scrolls to the preceding Down keyboard page when you press the pedal When the pedal is pressed during a layer If a song is stopped with the notation performance the Tone volume changes Page shown in the external display the notation between two levels depending on how firmly Fwd 2 in the external display scrolls to the next the pedal is pressed EX1 8 Lt Am D page when you press the pedal Pressing the pedal with
78. the remote control button functions refer to Using the Remote Control p 84 20 Opening and Closing the Lid 1 When opening the lid use both hands to gently lift the lid and slide it inward 2 When closing the lid be sure to use both hands to amp grasp the lid slowly pulling it down towards you and gently lower it until it stops fully closed CAUTION When opening and closing the lid be careful not to let your fingers get caught Small children should use it only under the supervision of an adult CAUTION When moving the piano for safety s sake be sure to close the lid first Make sure you don t have anything such as sheet music on the keyboard when you close the lid KR117 Although the KR117 s cover is designed to close slowly when you let go of it it will close immediately if it has been opened only slightly Take care not to catch or pinch your fingers in the cover KR115 Before You Start Playing wo T e 0 lt o E Connecting the Power Cord Connect the Pedal Cable HA E Q B Q z gt Q Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the S Screw Ex jack panel of the KR Screw Pedal Cord Cramp S amp CPS Sch Turning the Power On and Off Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speake
79. to be edited and how effects should be handled have now been precisely defined Moreover the available sounds have been expanded General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo In some cases the conventional form of General MIDI which does not include the new enhancements is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2 GS Format G The GS Format is Roland s set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds provides for the editing of sounds and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features including effects such as reverb and chorus Designed with the future in mind the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI Roland s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format and can be used to play back music data carrying either of these logos XG lite XGlite XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corpor
80. up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and MEMO display other songs About Random Performances When Favorites is selected as Touch the page icons D D to change pages the genre songs registered in Favorites are played back in The fingering is included in the notation random order ee F When External Memory is The chords are indicated in the notation y selected as the genre the songs You can display song lyrics in the folder appearing on the screen are played back in For audio files random order When you touch lt A gt songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in random order When you touch lt KJ all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played in order starting from the selected song When the last song is finished playback resumes from the first song in the genre 75 Chapter 3 Song Playback 2 3 lt D gt The selected song is played back This changes to lt ER while the song is played back playback stops when you touch lt ER By touching lt File gt you can then view information about the song p 182 and save songs to external memory p 116 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the song genre Touch the name of the song to be played back You use and the dial to select songs Playing back 4 Press the rm Play Stop button The button indicator lights up and playback of the song begi
81. upper part and lower part are displayed The upper part is displayed The lower part is displayed The User part is displayed EEE You can also touch lt Export gt to save the notation as an image file p 92 Va Under certain conditions the bouncing ball may not move as expected You can change the parts to be v 404dby gt displayed when you touch each of the icons p 91 MEM In some internal songs the fingering is displayed The fingering numbers shown in the screen indicate one possible fingering Va Chord names can be displayed in some of the internal songs and recorded performances using the KR s Chord Sequencer p 144 89 Chapter 4 Practice Functions 3 Touch q ke o Q ie lt V 90 for the parameter being set to select the value Press the Exit button to return to the Notation screen Item Setting Zoom On Displays an enlarged notation Sets whether or not the enlarged notation is Off Displays the notation at the normal size displayed Keyboard On Displayed Sets whether the keyboard is displayed Off Not displayed beneath the notation off The notation screen does not scroll automatically The notation screen scrolls automatically When the bouncing ball Se is blue playback begins from the point SE E in the notation where the ball is set sega ura When
82. 0 Piano 3w 237 Slap Bass 2 304 Solo Vox 371 Car Engine 171 Honky tonk 238 SynthBass101 305 5th Saw Wave 372 Car Stop 172 Honky tonk 2 239 Synth Bass 1 306 Bass amp Lead 373 Car Pass 173 E Piano 1 240 Synth Bass 2 307 Fantasia 374 Car Crash 174 E Piano 2 241 Synth Bass 3 308 Warm Pad 375 Siren 175 pts E Piano 242 Synth Bass 4 309 Polysynth 376 Train 176 E Piano 1v 243 Rubber Bass 310 Space Voice 377 Jetplane 177 E Piano 2v 244 Violin 311 Bowed Glass 378 Starship 178 Detuned EP 1 245 Slow Violin 312 Metal Pad 379 Burst Noise 179 Detuned EP 2 246 Viola 313 Halo Pad 380 Applause 180 Harpsichord 247 Cello 314 Sweep Pad 381 Laughing 181 Coupled Hps 248 Contrabass 315 Ice Rain 382 Screaming 182 Harpsi w 249 Tremolo Str 316 Soundtrack 383 Punch 183 Harpsi o 250 PizzicatoStr 317 Crystal 384 Heart Beat 184 Clav 251 Harp 318 Syn Mallet 385 Footsteps 185 Celesta 252 Timpani 319 Atmosphere 386 Gun Shot 186 Glockenspiel 253 Strings 320 Brightness 387 Machine Gun 187 Music Box 254 Orchestra 321 Goblin 388 Lasergun 188 Vibraphone 255 Slow Strings 322 Echo Drops 389 Explosion 189 Vibe w 256 Syn Strings1 323 Echo Bell 190 Marimba 257 Syn Strings2 324 Echo Pan 191 Marimba w 258 Syn Strings3 325 Star Theme 192 Xylophone 259 Choir Aahs 326 Sitar 193 Tubular bell 260 Choir 327 Sitar 2 194
83. 01 S ngs on CDS resi Detener EAk 77 Power On and Off ege eet EEN 21 Power swith iny cuties inane 21 E 61 Program Change teniseri oeae 191 EE 112 Punnch in Recordi ges onennip osiensa arin 142 Q Quantize Song Edit ENNEN 146 Quick Tour Automatically starting s sessessssssrsesssessststssssreee 180 R Reechklodd geigend E e 111 140 Record Playback Buttons cccceccseseseseeseneneeees 76 Recording eer diastase ditieiecessee ter avlesseeteteseterees 104 16 Track Sequencer c cccsescessesesteteteseeeeteseseeeeenens 139 AP De S NG eege 105 Along With a Song ceesesceccessetesesceceesesesneneeneees 109 Redoing recordings ccccsesccsesescsceneesesesneneneees 110 TrACK DUtONS deseori ee 110 With Accompaniment cccccceeesceeseseeteteeeeeees 107 Remote Control ccccccccsccessecssecessecseeeesseeeeees 84 85 172 Rep at ssscssvesteccdisseebenessuetasendas et eats sue DEE ae eia eripe 101 Replace Recording c cceesesceseesseseteseeteceesesesneneeneaes 140 Reset button ce eeecceeecseescesceseeeeeeceeceeeeeeseceecaeeeeaeeaees 76 RESON ON ere ees ee 91 Restoring the Factory Settings ccccccecceeeeenens 172 REV ebe ergeet 34 ROOEN OLE a i css ok Haslncdechoshas sradlestersrielyeHiatasedes kerise isade aS 59 Rotary eftect eccccccccccccsesesesneeseseeceseesescenesesesesnsneneneees 168 S SE 116 WSR Style EE O E coverengerotccer Suslediaraentaeeres 158 Screens 16 track Sequencer screen c
84. 1 Arabesque 2 Pastoral 3 A Small Gathering Practice Practice 4 Innocence 40 Invention 15 5 Progress 41 Beyer 15 6 The Clear Stream 42 Beyer 21 7 Gracefulness 43 Beyer 25 8 The Hunt 44 Beyer 29 9 Tender Flower 45 Beyer 34 10 The Young Shepherdess 46 Beyer 38 11 Farewell 47 Beyer 42 12 Consolation 48 Beyer 46 13 Austrian Dance 49 Beyer 51 14 Ballad 50 Beyer 55 15 Sighing 51 Beyer 60 16 The Chatterbox 52 Beyer 64 17 Restlessness 53 Beyer 67 18 Ave Maria 54 Beyer 73 19 Tarantella 55 Beyer 78 20 Angelic Harmony 56 Beyer 81 21 Gondola Song 57 Beyer 90 22 The Return 58 Beyer 93 23 The Swallow 59 Beyer 98 24 The Knight Errant 60 Beyer 103 25 Openness 61 Czerny 100 1 26 Invention 1 62 Czerny 100 10 27 Invention 2 63 Czerny 100 20 28 Invention 3 64 Czerny 100 30 29 Invention 4 65 Czerny 100 38 30 Invention 5 66 Czerny 100 43 31 Invention 6 67 Czerny 100 60 32 Invention 7 68 Czerny 100 75 33 Invention 8 69 Czerny 100 86 34 Invention 9 70 Czerny 100 96 35 Invention 10 36 Invention 11 All rights reserved Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than 37 Invention 12 private personal enjoyment is a 38 Invention 13 violation of applicable laws 39 Invention 14 s 2 pu ddy KA 0 4 K E 0 a a lt Parameters Stored to Internal Memory Parameters Stored
85. 1 Turning the Power On and Off een 21 About the Dedals ENEE 22 Adjusting the Sound s Volume and Brilliance tstek cate deed EA ential ae 22 Connecting Headphones ee 23 Connecting a Microphone cccccceceeeeieesesteneteeees 23 Connecting an External Display ss ssses11s05 15110 24 Making the Connections cccccsseseeseeeeteeees 24 About the Touch Screen o ccecscsceeeeseeeeeeeenenes 25 Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen 25 Main Screens egresso iasa iedee oo eSa 25 Piano Siteen deet ee Ee 25 Basic Deteett uerg 25 Using the Main Jong 26 The Option Button and The Exit Button 26 The Scroll Bar and The Page Jean 26 Chapter 1 Performance 27 Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano One Touch Piano 27 Performing with a Variety of Tones Tone Buttons ue 28 Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Blog geesde ee 29 Using Keywords to Search for Tones Tone Search 30 Performing with Multiple Sounds Layered Together Layer c cccscssecesesceeescsesesneneesesesneeneaees 31 10 Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands Split raatimies 32 Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift arnan i 33 Adding Reverberation to the Sound REVErB 2335 anunn iae E E NAAA 34 Adding the Surround Sound Effect to the Accompaniment Using External Speakers Surround vurasan anani a 36 Giving More Breadth to the Accompaniment Sound lessie ee inate data 36 Selecting the Part
86. 216 Saving the User Program Sets You can take the 36 User Programs saved to the User Program button and save them as a set to an external memory or to user memory When saving to an external memory first connect an external memory to the external memory port gt For more on working with the external memory refer to Using External Memories p 113 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Save gt A Save User Program screen like the following appears Save User Program USER SET 3 Rename HEI UREN External Menoru elo an Execute Giving a Name to a Set of User Programs 4 Touch lt Rename gt The Rename screen appears When you touch el gt When you touch the icon for the character to be input the cursor moves the character appears at the cursor position For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C gt A Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through English upper case English lower case nua numerals symbols then back to English upper Casel When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted 131 N D D I E a 5 V Chapter 7 User Program Registration When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position
87. 28 Bright Tp 7 Gospel Oohs 29 Warm Tp 8 Female Aahs 30 Dark Trumpet 9 F Chorus Luh 31 Romantic Tp2 10 Jazz Doos 32 Trombone 11 Kids Choir 33 Trombone 2 12 Angels Choir 34 Twin bones 13 Boys Choir 35 Bones Sect 14 Opera Voice 36 Bright Tb 15 Mellow Choir 37 Tuba 16 Holy Voices 38 MutedTrumpet 17 Morning Star 39 MuteTrumpet2 18 Mystic Str 40 MuteTrumpet3 19 Trancy X 41 French Horns 20 HPF Slicer 87 Fat amp Perky 21 Side Band X 88 Delayed Lead 22 Glasswaves 89 Fantasia 23 Church Choir 90 Fantasia 2 24 Voice Oohs 91 New Age Pad 25 Voice Oohs 2 92 New Age Pad2 26 Choir Hahs 93 Sugar Key 27 Decay Choir 94 FreezinNight 28 DcyGregorian 95 New Year Day 29 Doos Voice 96 Warm Pad 30 Doot Accent 97 Sine Pad 31 Dat Accent 98 Nu Epic Pad 32 Bap Accent 99 Hollow Pad 33 Thum Voice 100 Decay Pad 34 Humming 101 Decay Pad2 35 SynVox 102 DecayDoosPad 36 Analog Voice 103 Polysynth 37 InfinitePhsr 104 P5 Poly 38 X Super Saws 105 Poly King 39 Fat Stacks 106 Octave Stack 40 Frgile Saws 107 Hoovercraft 41 SuperSawSlow 108 DOC Stack 42 Electrostars 109 Bustranza 43 Bending Logo 110 Space Voice 44 2600 Sine 111 Heaven II 45 Square Wave 112 Warm SquPad 46 Mg Square 113 Voyager 47 JP8 Square 114 Film Cue 48 LM Square 115 HumanKindnes 49 Syn Sq
88. 6 Track Sequencer p 136 and other related sections When using music data first select a song p 75 Displaying the Style Converter screen 2 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears 3 Touch lt Style Converter gt If no song for use in creating a new Style is selected the message Please select a song appears Use the Song button to select a song p 75 then start the procedure again If a User Style has already been recorded a message like the one shown below appears OK to delete Stule OK Kg Touch lt Cancel gt to return to The Composer Menu screen Please save the User Style on an external memory or in the internal memory p 158 When you touch lt OK gt the previously recorded User Style is deleted and a new User Style is created 156 A Style Converter screen like the one shown appears 4138 M Sonate No 15 4 4 M 1 Conv Mode futo Chord Tupe Major f Play Part Execute Parameter Settings Content Name Conv Mode Switches the mode Auto Manual Chord Root Chord root for the segment to be extracted Chord type for the segment to be Chord Type extracted major minor seventh Division Division From Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be extracted For Number of measures extracted Making the Settings 4 Touch lt Conv Mode gt then use the
89. 65 touch Factory Reset A screen like the one shown below appears Factory Reset This vill restore all the internal memory contents to factory presets Execute Touch lt Execute gt The confirmation message appears on screen Touch lt OK gt to restore the original factory settings When you have finished making the settings switch off the power then switch it back on again When you touch lt Cancel gt the settings are left untouched and you re returned to the previous screen Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable 172 E Changing the Functions of the Remote Control s Buttons You can change the functions assigned to the remote control s buttons At step 3 in Procedure p 165 touch lt Remote Control gt A screen like the one shown below appears Remote Control Lyric S Zoom Color oon On LILLI ON OFF FUNCI FUNC2 Switching ON OFF of the Remote Control 1 Touch lt ON OFF gt t L to switch On Off of the remote control Display Off Not received Explanation On Received 2 Press the Exit button to return to the Functions screen Changing the FUNC1 FUNC2 Button Functions 1 Touch lt FUNC1 gt lt FUNC2 gt functions to FUNC1 FUNC2 button Display Explanation Each time the FUNC1 or FUNC 2
90. 8 Creating and Editing Songs 6 When you press the gt Play Stop button recording begins 7 When you get to the place where you want to change the tempo use the Tempo and buttons or the dial to vary the tempo as desired 8 When you press the gt Play Stop button recording stops The song s tempo changes You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording mode When you re finished tempo recording go back to the ordinary Replace Recording Take a look at Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode p 140 152 E Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected measure This is handy when you want to make a sudden change in tempo First carry out Steps 1 3 of Changing the Tempo Within the Song p 151 to make the Tempo Recording settings 1 Use the lt lt Bwd and gt Fwd buttons to move to the measure where you want to change the tempo The measure number appears in the top right area of the Basic screen 2 Press the Rec button and watch the indicator is flashing The KR is put in recording standby 3 Use the Tempo buttons or the dial to change the tempo 4 Press the gt Play Stop button The song s tempo changes starts with the measure you selected e While tempo recording is being used to write tempo the tempo display in the screen will be highl
91. AIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Soi Verng NakornKasem New Road Sumpantawongse Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 224 8821 VIETNAM SAIGON MUSIC DISTRIBUTOR TAN DINH MUSIC 138 Tran Quang Khai Street Dist 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL 08 848 4068 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel 02 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BARBADOS A amp B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey St Michael Barbados TEL 246 430 1100 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin Colombia TEL 574 3812529 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc Orionweg 30 Curacao Netherland Antilles TEL 305 5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto
92. Basic screen when headphones are connected You can add three dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones p 39 MEMD When you touch Octave lt gt lt gt in the tone selection screen the pitch of the keyboard s sound is changed in octave units To learn more see Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift p 33 MEMD You can change the volume balance between the upper and lower parts of the keyboard refer to Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance p 73 Chapter 1 Performance Turning On Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously Turning on either Layer Performance or Split Performance allows you to divide the keyboard into a upper and a lower part and play with two Tones layered in the lower part and three Tones layered in the upper part 47158 EBPop ER CH feoustic Be T me Split_ E Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift When using layer performance p 31 or split performance p 32 you can change the pitch of the keyboard s sound in octave units This function is called Octave Shift For example when playing a Layer performance if you change the pitch of one of the tones and then layer it it changes the impression created with the tone On the Basic screen touch lt Layer1 gt or lt Split gt The KR switches to layer performance or split performance To apply Octave Shi
93. Bosa 39 Japan 40 Bluegrass 28 Jazz Bossa 40 Ireland 41 Deep Country 29 Merengue 41 Paso Doble 30 GuitarRhumba 42 China Pop 21 Mambo 43 Jiang Nan Big Band 32 Fast Samba 44 Xi Bei Swing 33 Fast Bossa 45 SchlagerBeat 34 Big Samba 46 PartySchlagr 1 MidnitSloSwg 35 Luv Bossa 47 70sSchlager 2 BigBand Slow 36 Mid Bossa 48 Disco Fox 3 Big Band 37 Latin Pop 2 49 Party Polka 4 BigBand Med 38 Reggae 50 RockSchlager 5 BigBand Fast 39 Tango 51 ShufflSchlgr 6 PnoBndBoogie 40 Beguine 52 SimpleMarch1 7 Soft zBallad 41 Oye Son D3 SimpleMarch2 8 Slow Fox 42 Revival 54 Simple Waltz 9 Medium Swing 43 Gospel Piano 55 Kids 4 4 0 Jive 44 Asian Rhumba 56 Kids 6 8 1 Slow Swing 57 Kids 2 Quick Step 58 Kids Dance 3 StringsSwing 59 Cinema 2Beat 4 Foxtrot D Swing Fox 6 Fox Band 7 Gipsy Swing 8 Fast Swing 9 JzGuitrSwing 20 Jazz Waltz 21 Blue Boogie 22 BigBandBalad 23 30s BigBand Music Style List KR115 9 UnplugBallad 0 Adult Pop 1 1 Adult Pop 2 2 6 8Unplugged 3 6 8GuitarPop 4
94. Cha CowBell Cha Cha CowBell TR 808 Cowbell Vox Tut 57 Pop Crash Cymbal 2 Chinees Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Vox Tyun rm Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Vox Tdum Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Pop Ride Cymbal 3 Jazz Ride Cymbal 3 Ride Cymbal 2 Vox Afahhhh 60 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 1 EEE Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 1 62 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 2 Mute High Conga 1 ee Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 2 Open High Conga 1 64 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 2 Low Conga 1 65 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale E Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale 67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo ep Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo 69 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Cabasa Shaker 3 Ei Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Maracas Shaker 4 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi W ste EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 72 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 HEHE Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 74 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro ECH HipVibraslap EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 a Claves Claves Claves TR 808 Claves Claves 76 High Wood Block High Wood Block
95. Chorus ries Enhancer gt This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in se Flanger ries Enhancer gt This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in se Delay ries Hexa Chorus Uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to give richness and spatial spread to the sound Chorus gt Delay This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series Flanger gt Delay This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series Tremolo Chorus This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Space D Produces a transparent chorus effect 3D Chorus This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound 2 Band Chorus A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect inde pendently to the low frequency and high frequen cy ranges horus gt E This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series Flanger On an acoustic piano holding down the damper Damper pedal allows other strings to resonate in sympathy P with the notes you play creating rich and spacious Resonance resonances This effect simulates these damper res onances 209 sooipueddy KA 0 4 K E 0 a a lt Music Style List KR117
96. Church Bell 261 Pop Voice 328 Banjo 195 Carillon 262 SynVox 329 Shamisen 196 Santur 263 OrchestraHit 330 Koto 197 Organ 1 264 Trumpet 331 Taisho Koto 198 Organ 2 265 Trombone 332 Kalimba 199 Pop Organ 1 266 Trombone 2 333 Bagpipe 200 Detuned Or 1 267 Tuba 334 Fiddle 201 Detuned Or 2 268 MutedTrumpet 335 Shanai 202 Church Org 1 269 French Horns 336 Tinkle Bell 203 Church Org 2 270 French Horn2 337 Agogo 204 Church Org 3 271 Brass 1 338 Steel Drums 205 Full Organ 272 Brass 2 339 Woodblock 206 Jazz Organ1 273 Synth Brass1 340 Castanets 207 Rock Organ 274 Synth Brass2 341 Taiko 208 Reed Organ 275 Synth Brass3 342 Concert BD 209 Accordion Fr 276 Synth Brass4 343 Melo Tom 1 210 Accordion It 277 AnalogBrass1 344 Melo Tom 2 211 Harmonica 278 AnalogBrass2 345 Synth Drum 212 Bandoneon 279 Soprano Sax 346 808 Tom 213 Nylon str Gt 280 Alto Sax 347 Elec Perc 214 Nylon Gt 2 281 Tenor Sax 348 Reverse Cym 215 Nylon Gt o 282 Baritone Sax 349 Gt FretNoise wv 216 Ukulele 283 Oboe 350 Gt Cut Noise 217 Steel str Gt 284 English Horn 351 String Slap ES 218 12 str Gt 285 Bassoon 352 Breath Noise S 219 Mandolin 286 Clarinet 353 Fl Key Click E 220 Jazz Guitar 287 Piccolo 354 Seashore 204 No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion
97. E Superior Grd 2 4 M 1 f Solo f Mute f Clear Tone Set Part 4 Touch the part you want to have associated with key movement The following shows the relationship between the indication in the display icons played parts and keyboard movement Icon Keyboard Sound Movement Sound No Movement This part is not Sound selected No sound No movement no performance data for this part No movement No sound 5 Press the Exit button to return to the Functions screen Chapter 10 Various Settings Changing the CD Settings E Setting the Type of CD To Be Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Played Back Drive The KR may be unable to correctly recognize the type of CD being used In such instances you can specify the type of CD 1 Press the Menu button manually The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen 1 Press the Menu button appears 7 S E The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen 2 Touch lt L gt lt L gt to switch the page then touch appears a 2 Touch lt L gt lt L gt to switch the page then touch A screen like the one shown below appears lt CD gt A screen like the one shown below appears gt This screen is displayed when CD is selected as the category in the Song Select screen even when you press the Option button gt This screen is displayed when CD is selected as the categ
98. EEE E N i R 33 One Touch Program Arranger button 008 58 One Touch Program Piano button ee 27 One Touch Settings ccccecscsesceteeseeseneteseeceesesesnenenes 162 One Touch Arranger massen eiie iiid sn ieas 58 SENES aeiee aa E E E E 161 One Touch Piano sssssssssssssessissessessissiesesssssiesiesessssneenees 27 Opening Message s ss sssesesisssssstsrtsrsterttesssertessterntsss 171 Original teeri rei EE EEE E Ea EEE E EEES TEE 57 Original button sasssa i 68 Output Jacks ege reide eege 192 P Panel kock iite ess Siete Adee cits R 181 Part Balance s i ore E N a RRR 73 Part Balance button sss sssessesssssesseessssssseersssesreesseseeese 73 Part Exchange Song Edit ccccccccecceeeeeenenenes 149 PC Edit Song Edit assises cie rsieseieeiistesarsiiteiie 150 Pedal uge dee 22 91 Eat bleech 21 Pedal Connector ENEE 16 Pedal Connector eisereen 21 Pedal Jacke s iieiea e ea ates eestor E 185 Pedal Settings EE 167 Fernseh ebe 29 Performance Pad ccccccccscccsscesscessscesseceseeeseeeseees 69 167 PNONES JaCk E 23 Phones Jacks iis sienne naaa sas 16 PIANO EE 27 Piano Screen eege 25 Tital SET A E E O 112 PitehesS side eet 90 Play Mode steriet Mesni te EES 182 Play Stop button ec eneen 76 large EE 75 All of the internal songs ccccecceceeeteesesteteeneees 75 Ata fixed tempo Tempo Mute ccceeecee 95 Jo and OM wi 0i asses eth ees tla ones 75 Repedtiac onse a eae teo AAE Ee 1
99. High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block 7 Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block E Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 High Hoo EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 79 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Low Hoo EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Wan Mute Triangle1 EXC5 Mute Triangle1 EXC5 Mute Triangle1 EXC5 Mute Triangle2 EXC5 Mute Triangle1 EXC5 81 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle2 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 rm Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell 84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree E Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets 8 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 EA Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 88 Cana Cana Cana Applause 2 Cana 39 Hi Timbale Flam Hi Timbale Flam Hi Timbale Flam HipHop SD 2 Hi Timbale Flam LE Lo Timbale Flam Lo Timbale Flam Lo Timbale Flam LoFi SD Rim Lo Timbale Flam 91 Timbale Phrase Timbale Phrase Timbale Phrase TR 808 Clap Timbale Phrase Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute ES a g g on i High Bongo Mute Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Bongo CowBell Bongo CowBell High Bongo Mute Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Bongo CowBell Bongo CowBell Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Bongo CowBell Bong
100. If you want to delete the Program Change touch lt Delete gt The measure number appears in the top right area of the When you re done making all the settings press the Exit apiece button EE Touch lt I gt to move to the beginning of the song Touch lt gt l gt to move to the end of the song in each to set the beat 4 Touch L 150 Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs 5 Touch lt Execute gt The beat change starts with the measure you selected Repeat Steps 3 5 to make beat settings in other measures as needed Recording the Performance 6 Press the Exit button twice The screen displayed before you pressed the Menu button appears 7 Press the ta Reset button to return the measure number to 1 8 Start a recording Record the performance using the procedures described in Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance p 104 Specify the measure then change the beat Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs You can change the basic tempo of a composition The basic tempo was initially set when the song was recorded 1 Press the Tempo and buttons to choose a tempo 2 Hold down the Rec button and press the ma Reset button The song s basic tempo changes The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn off the power or choose a different song Save important song data to external memory or to user memory p 116 If the song y
101. L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of December 10 2005 ROLAND For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement Model Name KR117M KR115M amp 115 Type of Equipment Digital Piano Responsible Party Roland Corporation U S Address 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 Telephone 323 890 3700 For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the followin
102. Manual Punch In Out occ ccccceeessecessseeeseesees 142 ER 98 164 Brasimng a a A E A EE E eSa 99 MOVING hsa e SA EAEE 100 Placing Aaen tere nearer aE AE ent 98 Repeat sasea na ee a VINEE E ETI 101 Master Tuning EEN 170 Melody Intelligence nisse 70 Melody Intelligence button 0 0 cece ee eeees 70 222 Memory Backuprs i iii pn inetr re Anea 171 Metronome Zone edd 54 Beat EE 55 IS E 56 SOUND RE 55 Volume e dee 55 Metronome button ceceeeseeeceeeeeeteeseeeeeeeeaeeeeenters 54 AEA Feel E cocreverserserteretrecrevserevrererrrec 16 en cia stcnvtia rian E E dean 23 Mic Volume knob u cceecceeesesseseceeceeseeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 23 Mic Volume Knob EEN 16 Microphone asepa i 23 MDI Zeta 188 MIDI Connector esra i iaai 188 MIDI Connectors insannin aii 16 MIDI Devices gasim ana n 188 MIDI Ensemble ngino prano 189 MIDI Seting Sn eneen deer 189 Minus One e ee 97 Mix Recording seesinane pty E 141 MOVING Key En 175 176 Multitrack Recording e 136 M sie Filess seat 52 Music Holder seeat e 30 iais 20 Musie Style eoh ees Eeer ier E T deans 57 On External Memory nsssesssssssssissssssesstesstestesssesesss 63 Rhythm Pattern e a aeara pa eE PRESE Erai 64 Musie Style Buttons Sissa 61 Music Style List isisa trsi penini Narai Atki 210 Mute erg oder 97 137 N KE 105 ANKI rein To a EE 87 Saving as image data c ceecccsceseseeeeteteseseeteenes 92 DCMI EE dee ee 89 Note Edit Song Edit e 149 0 Octave SMI i ens a e E
103. Maracas Maracas Helicopter Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Starship Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Gun Shot Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Machine Gun Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Lasergun Claves Claves Claves Explosion High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block Dog Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Horse Gallop Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Birds Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Rain Mute Triangle1 EXC5 Mute Triangle1 EXC5 Mute Triangle1 EXC5 Thunder Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Wind Shaker Shaker Shaker Seashore Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Stream Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bubble Castanets Castanets Castanets Cat Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Bird Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 BabyLaughing Se Applause Boeeeen eee Bee Glass amp Glam Pepe S Ice Ring SEN iere Crack Bottle a a Pour Bottle Sa a Car Horn a sO ees R Crossing ee OS SL1 a SL2 Sa ereg Seal SS Eeer Bee e Fancy Animal a a oe Elephant H i re Bike KX AO a Pc E Se H Small Club o AE E GE NEE E Ai leen 1 en a a a_a lt Effect Type Explanation Effect Type Explanation Equalizer This is a four band stereo equalizer low high The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary Spectrum This i
104. Mode of the Aux 9 494dpy gt input to Off If this is set to anything other than Off make sure to disconnect any cables connected to Aux Out or Balanced Out If such connections are left intact you may likely encounter a loud continuous beep tone 127 Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys A V sync Touch the lt Mode gt KA Ki to select A V sync When you display the Song selection screen after you set A V Sync for the lt Mode gt setting and the song category automatically changes to Aux Input Decode 4 Play back the performance on the connected device E Making Advanced A V Sync Input Settings 1 e Press the Menu button The A V Sync display will appear If the Composer Menu screen appears touch L to switch the page 2 e Press the Option button The following display will appear Se Q a ie V 3 Touch the slider or j to set for the parameter Parameter Setting Explanation On rare occasions the keyboard performance and accompaniment sounds may not be synchronized roperly n Kal H Ga Sync 0100 In such instances you can adjust the timing of the keyboard performance sounds so that they are in time with the accompaniment Level 0 127 Audio level other than keyboard performance data 128 When A V Sync is selected the KR automatically distin
105. Procedure p 165 touch Touch Screen A screen like the one shown below appears Touch lt Execute gt below to start calibration Factory Reset Execute Touch lt Execute gt Touch the points indicated Do this carefully because touching a location that s different from the one indicated for the pointer may make the displacement even worse Be sure to touch the pointer accurately When the calibration is finished touch lt Write gt to store the settings If you don t write them to memory the calibration settings will be discarded as soon as the power is switched off Returning the Touch Screen Calibration Settings to the Original Factory Settings If you touch lt Factory Reset gt in the above screen the touch screen calibration settings revert to the original factory settings Changing the Part That Makes the Keys Move Only for Instrument Equipped with Moving Key Changing the Moving Keys Settings You can have the keys move automatically along with the performance 1 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears A U Sunc 2 Touch lt Moving Key gt at the lower left of the screen to switch the function on or off Icon Keyboard On Movement Off No movement 3 Press the Exit button to return to the Functions screen 175 ITU Chapter 10 Various Settings Using the Track Buttons
106. Program button el Touch lt File gt 2 Touch lt Delete gt A Delete User Program screen like the following appears Delete User Prooram enema External Memory KJ CJ SI mp Wee Execute 4 Touch lt Media gt gt to select the strage media 5 Touch lt File gt Ea to select the set of User Programs to be deleted 6 Touch lt Execute gt The selected User Programs are deleted Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable Copying Sets of User Programs on External Memories to the User Memory You can copy sets of User Programs saved on external memories and to user memory You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user memory and to external memories 1 Connect the external memory with the settings to be copied to the external memory port 2 Touch the User Program button 3 Touch lt File gt 4 Touch lt Copy gt A Copy User Programs screen like the following appears Copy User Program LEON External Menory ele SW 61 USER SET2 Kate Execute Specifying the Copy Source 5 Touch lt Media gt gt to select the strage L424 dpy gt media 8 t to select the set of User Programs you want to copy 6 Touch lt File gt If All is selected all of the sets of User P
107. Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Cana Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Ban Gu 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Taiko 1 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale Nao Bo EXC8 Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Taiko 2 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo Xiao Bo 1 EXC8 Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Taiko 3 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Open High HuYinLuo 2 EXC8 Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Taiko 4 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Taiko 5 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Open High HuYinLuo 1 Short Guiro ESCH Short Guiro ESCH Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Taiko 6 Long Guiro ESCH Long Guiro ESCH Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Shou Luo 1 Claves Claves Claves Claves Mute Low HuYinLuo 2 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block Shou Luo 2 Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Xiao Bo 2 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Ban Gu 2 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Xiao Bo 3 Mute Triangle1 EXC5 Mute Triangle1 EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 M
108. Roland KREHZ 11 DIGITAL INTELLIGENT PIANO Owner s Manual Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 4 5 and IMPORTANT NOTES p 6 7 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s Manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture CAUTION The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK gt S a DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR constitute a risk of electric shock to persons CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK intended to alert the user to the presence of important NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL literature accompanying the product The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING
109. Score button The Notation screen appears 4 Press the Option button 5 e Touch lt Export gt A screen like the one shown below appears Start Measure 1 Direction Portrait End Measure 146 Media External Memory Execute 92 Chapter 4 Practice Functions 6 Touch the respective parameter and set the range of image data and other settings with the dial Item Setting Description Start 12 Selects the measure at which output measure begins h t which output End Measure song end Selects the measure at which outpu ends Portrait Sets the orientation of the notation Direction Landscape being output External Memory Selects the media for the save Media Disk destination 7 e Touch lt Execute gt The notation is saved to the external memory as image data in BMP bitmap format You cannot save copyrighted song data Other than for your own personal enjoyment use of the notations that are output without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law Saving Your Visual Lesson Performance Results When you practice with Visual Lesson the notation showing the model performance appears in the screen above the notation for your own performance You can save these notation in BMP bitmap format 1 While in the performance results confirmation screen in Visual Lesson press the Option button Touch the parameter whose settin
110. Select messages Others can handle Bank Selects but do not recognize the LSB part Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device Composer MIDI Out When Composer Out is active you can send performance data recorded with the KR to a connected MIDI device or computer When you turn on the power this is set to OFF data is not sent 1 Press the Menu button 2 Touch lt Composer MIDI Out gt Composer MIDI Out 3 Touch LEE to set ON or OFF 4 Press the Exit button to return to The Composer Menu screen Connecting to Audio Equipment You can connect audio devices to play the sound of the KR through the speakers of your audio system or to record your performance on a recording device E Connectors KR s Jack Panel Front MIDI Aux Input Out In L R Rear Aux OO Balanced Out ized R L Mono o L 8 Inputt O 10 dBu Es EH 191 Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices Output Jacks Main Output Aux Output You can connect audio equipment using audio cables sold separately and play the sounds from the KR through the speakers on the connected equipment or record your performances on a recording device If the input of the connected device is monaural you must use the L Mono jack Input Jacks Input Aux Input You can connect another sound generator such as audio equipment or an electronic instrument using audio
111. Setting User Functions p 167 e Inputting a short Intro and Ending Assign Intro 2 Ending 2 to a pedal or pad e Inputting a Variation or Original without a Fill In Assign Original Variation to a pedal or pad e Using the keyboard to input slash chords such as Fm C Assign Leading Bass to a pedal or pad e Inputting a break somewhere within the song Assign Break to a pedal or pad e Insert half fill ins fill ins lasting half a measure Assign Half Fill In to a pedal or pad Check the Accompaniment You Inserted Here s how to play back as much of the accompaniment as you have input 1 Press the 4 Reset button to return to the beginning of the song 2 When you press the gt Play Stop button the performance is played back 3 Playback stops when you press the gt Play Stop button once more E inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard You can use lt Chords gt at the bottom left of the Chord Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen 1 At the Chord Sequencer screen touch lt Chords gt A screen like the one shown below appears Chord Selector DH Bass Execute in each to specify the chords 3 Touch lt Execute gt to enter the chord You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs Editing Songs There are many ways you can edit performances recorded using t
112. Snare 1 Standard 3 Snare 1 Room Snare 1 TR 909 Clap TR 909 Clap TR 808 Clap TR 808 Clap TR 808 Clap Standard 1 Snare 2 Standard 1 Snare 2 Standard 2 Snare 2 Standard 3 Snare 2 Room Snare 2 Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 Room Low Tom 2 Close Hi hat1 EXC1 Close Hi hat1 EXC1 Closed Hi hat 2 EXC1 Closed Hi hat 3 EXC1 Closed Hi hat 4 EXC1 Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Room Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi hat 1 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 1 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 2 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 2 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 2 EXC1 Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 Room Mid Tom 2 Open Hi hat 1 EXC1 Open Hi hat 1 EXC1 Open Hi hat 2 EXC1 Open Hi hat 3 EXC1 Open Hi hat 4 EXC1 Mid Tom 1 Mid Tom 1 Mid Tom 1 Mid Tom 1 Room Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 High Tom 2 High Tom 2 High Tom 2 Room High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom 1 High Tom 1 High Tom 1 High Tom 1 Room High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2
113. Steel 19 EX Orchestra 30 EX A Guitar3 20 Slow Violin 31 Steel Vox 21 PizzicatoStr 32 Ukulele 22 Strings 33 Hawaiian Gt 23 Oct Strings 34 Clean Gt 24 Strings 2 35 JC Clean Gt 25 DecayStrings 36 Mid Tone GTR 26 Bright Str 37 TC Rear Pick 27 Slow Strings 38 Acid Guitar 28 SlowStrings2 39 Open Hard 29 Legato Str 40 Feedback Gt 30 Warm Strings 41 Power Guitar 31 Sahara Str 42 Guitar Pinch 32 Decay Str2 43 Mystic Gtr 33 Decay Str3 44 Funk Gt 34 Tremolo Str 45 Funk Gt 2 35 Orchestra 46 Muted Gt 36 Orchestra 2 47 Muted Dis Gt 37 Farewell 48 Rock Rhythm 38 Choir Str 49 Dist Rtm GTR 39 Bell Strings 50 Wah Brush Gt 40 Pearly Harp 51 A Bass Cymbl 41 Harp 52 Acoustic Bs 42 St Harp 53 Rockabilly 43 Viola Tone List 44 Contrabass 42 F
114. Style E Changing the Volume Balance Between the Accompaniment and the Keyboard Balance Knob When this knob is turned You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the completely to the notes you play on the keyboard Accompaniment side no sounds from the keyboard are 1 e Adjust the volume balance with the Balance knob audible even when the keys are pressed You can usually leave the knob at the center position E Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style and the balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard Cr 1 e Press the Part Balance button and watch the indicator light up The following Part Balance screen appears Part Balance Bhythn Bass fAicco al ee EE iee eee Keyboard Switch the screens 73 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment The volume balance between the performance parts in the Music Style is indicated Display Performance part Rhythm Music Style Rhythm Part Bass Music Style Bass Part Accomp1 Accomp2 Accomp3 Accompaniment 1 6 Accomp4 Accomp5 Accomp6 Chord Tone Chord Tone p 66 Bass Tone Bass Tone p 66 WAV Audio File CD Only with models Audio CD featuring CD Drive When you touch lt Keyboard gt a screen like the fol
115. a connected sound module with the KR Recording KR Performances on a Recording Device 7 Start recording with the connected device 8 Play the keyboard 9 When the performance ends stop recording on the connected equipment Turning off the power 1 Set the volume of the KR and of the connected devices to the minimum position 2 Turn off the connected equipment 3 Turn off the power to the KR Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the Speakers on the KR KR s Jack Panel Rear Aux OO kg Balanced Out ixe R L Mono L S Input S 10 dBu Ke Output R L Line Out Aux lo KR s Jack Panel Rear MIDI Aux An Ge aa Output R L Line Out Aux Out Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device you re about to connect Turn off the power to the KR and other connected equipment Use audio cables sold separately to make the connection Turn on the connected equipment Turn on the KR Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected device You cannot use the KR to adjust the volume of the connected sound generating device Turning off the power 2 3 Set the volume of the KR and of the connected devices to the minimum position Turn off the power to the KR Turn off the connected equipment Making the Aux Input Jack Settings Use this pro
116. a ee DEE EENS External memory t connector Ea Py S AW gt For details about connecting an external display refer to p 185 NOTE Some images may not be displayed in the slide show if 500 or more files including images are contained in a single folder O Image data that KR can display Size 640 x 480 pixels recommended Format BMP format JPEG format Extension bmp jpg E Running a Slide Show of Images Stored on External Memory Preparing the Images 1 Using a computer prepare the images you want to display 2 Connect the USB memory to the computer and create a folder named _PICTURE on the USB memory 3 Place the images you want to display in the PICTURE folder 178 Running the Slide Show 4 Connect the external memory to the external memory port A slide show of the images stored in the _PICTURE folder on the USB memory appears on the external display gt The Mode value in the External Display Setting screen automatically changes to Slide Show The Mode value may not automatically switch to Slide Show while Wonderland Demo or certain other functions are in use If this occurs quit the function currently being used Afterwards select Slide Show for the Mode setting manually in the External Display Setting screen Changing the Sequence of Images in Slide Shows You can have
117. aE 162 Audio Equipment ee 191 Auto Punch In Out woe ccccscccscsceesssecssssseesesens 142 Automatic Accompaniment ee 57 AutoSync DigiScore pioet ie iaai naninita 88 Aux Input E 16 Aux Output Jacks ee 16 194 B Balance miiia ea a Ea E EAER ESS 73 Balance Knob isinin eii aeia EEN 73 Balanced Out Fixed Jacks essees 16 192 Bank Select LSB inair erti sE 191 Bank Select MSB 202 191 Basic Screen siiip itoi e paaa 25 Basic tenipo EE 151 Bass Copie ed Savin eases 66 162 Beat Metronome ingore ei a TE reet egen 55 Beat Mag ironiese nn mee aE EE e a reece 150 Bend Range onies naoek ei eiiean 169 Blank Recording E 141 Bouncing Ball Sunset gesuegt ec 92 Brilliance knob aeni anas 22 Song button i i ees 75 Bw Dutton iina es A a E 76 Cc Kallratog 2 ssid shiepeetcntests eege 175 KK ste Ri ANG teste outs cea eee Re ee 177 CD Drive pa in a EE 78 CD SEGNE E 177 Chord Finder 4 csisisessices cesresehiteceschewecteiaieveentteatigssscads 60 Chord Intelligence een 59 Chord List E 212 Chord Sequencer nienia ineto 143 Chord one eirioes oaa ai Raen 66 162 Chord Lee eege eege dee 59 Chords icin sii eee ate E neat ah fis 59 90 Clef DEE 91 Elek reegen 91 Color Notations ri c c ceca sia i went eer 92 Composer MIDI Out ccccecccseecssescececesescsesteneneneees 191 Computer daren E AA eE 195 Connected Expression Pedal ue 185 Connecting Audio Equipment s ssssesssssssestsssrsseertesssertessseestes 191 EE 195 External Di
118. aged or the data on it become corrupted making playback impossible We recommend saving your songs on two different media Ka When you want to clear all of the content saved to the Favorites and restore the settings to the original factory condition on the KR refer to Formatting the User Memory p 180 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Determining the Name of the Song to be Saved 4 Touch lt Rename gt The following Rename screen appears x f Ins ll Del ABC DEF GHI JKL HNO POR STU dn Y2 When you touch KJ Li When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input the character appears the cursor moves at the cursor location For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through English upper case nu nua English lower case numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position 5 e When you have finished with the name press the Exit button Determining the Save Destination 6 Touch lt Media gt KJ a to select the save destination storage media 7 e Touch lt File gt o select the save dest
119. aj7 Abmaj7 Amaj7 Bb maj7 Bmaj7 eT PET PELE PEA LP PTA F 7 F m F m7 Gm7 Am7 Bb m Bb m7 B7 ae e n Cerman a r rN Bm Bm7 Weg AEn et m Wim e vm OTE F dim Gdim Abdim Adim Bb dim Bdim TEE TE ee eee COREE ELT CEREUS PS ert F m7 b5 Gm7 b5 Abm7 b5 Am7 b5 F aug Gaug Abaug Aaug Bb m7 b5 Bb aug Bm7 b5 mr Wm Baug EENE CERT EEEE EM F sus4 Gsus4 Absus4 Asus4 Bb sus4 Bsus4 PEPE TE COPE EELT CPT F 7sus4 G7sus4 Ab7sus4 A7sus4 Bb 7sus4 B7sus4 See TE CETTE ETE CEPT EAE CEE CEE CPP F 6 Bb6 B6 PERE Wm Dr Waren We PELE F m6 Abm6 Bbm6 FE gem UE We E ETON 213 s 2 pu ddy KA o 4 K E 0 a a lt Internal Song List Folks 1 Greensleeves 2 Entertainer 3 Annie Laurie 4 Londonderry Air 5 Ave Maria 6 Amazing Grace 7 Little Brown Jug 8 When The Saints Go Marchin In 9 Stagecoach 10 Hallelujah Jazzy 1 Grand Symphoney 2 Trio Grande 3 Fly Free 4 Secret Agent 5 Late Night Chopin 6 Blue Sky Rag 7 Preludelight 8 Sun Daze 9 Keepers Tale 10 Count On
120. al display first disconnect the television from the Video Out jack then connect the external display connector 3 Switch on the KR 4 This sets the display format device p 187 5 Switch on the connected display gt For more on handling the external display refer to your display s owner s manual Turning the Power Off After use turn off the power using the following procedure 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KR 2 Turn off the KR 3 Turn off the connected display E Connecting a Television Video Cable Sold separately Video Out KR s Jack Panel Video Out jack USD Television 186 Making the Connections Always be sure to use the following procedure when connecting a television You cannot display information or images with a television when an external display is connected to the Ext Display connector To use an television first disconnect the external display from the Ext Display connector then connect the Video Out jack 1 Turn off the power to the KR and the television to be connected 2 Use a video cable sold separately to connect the KR s Video Out jack with the television s video input jack 3 Turn on the power to the KR 4 This sets the display format device p 187 5 Turn on the power to the television E Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display and the Television External Display This selects the content
121. also assign functions to the button p 172 gt gt When you press the gt gt button the next song is selected 10 VOL yi You can adjust the volume Volume This adjusts the tempo u TEMPOS You can also assign functions to the button p 172 This transposing sounds from the keyboard and songs being played back 12 TRANSPOSE You can also assign functions to the button p 172 86 Chapter 4 Practice Functions With the KR you can enjoy practice using a variety of functions Displaying the Notation The KR can display notations not only for the internal songs but for music files and performances recorded with the KR This is very convenient for performing while reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded When you play back a music file with lyrics the lyrics appear on screen Selecting the song When playing back songs on external memories first connect the external memory to the external memory port 1 e Press the Song button to select a song For details refer to Playing a Song p 75 2 Press the DigiScore button The Notation screen appears 3 Press the FIR Play Stop button Playback of the song begins and the notation advances along with the progression of the performance Notes Regarding the Notation Display e Since the displayed notation data is read from external memory or the internal memory some time may
122. animent 1 Accompaniment 2 Accompaniment 3 Accompaniment 4 Accompaniment 5 and Accompaniment 6 57 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment One Touch Arranger Here s how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment Oo ES 0 0 Piano Arranger LT One Touch Program 3 58 Press the One Touch Program Arranger button The Basic screen like the one shown below appears 4 120 68 805 Rock 4 4 M 1 Superior Grd Upper Observe the settings e The keyboard is split into left and right hand parts with accompaniment chords specified for the left hand side of the keyboard e A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set Play a chord on the Lower part of keyboard The accompaniment begins starting from the intro Play chords with the left hand and the melody with the right When you change chords in the left hand the accompaniment also changes Split Point F 3 The range specifyed a chord Press the Intro Ending button After the ending plays the accompaniment stops Q appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen when headphones are connected You can add three dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones p 39 em Normally when you change a Music Style the tem
123. appears and the settings are made for automatic accompaniment e Press the One Touch Program Piano button then press one of the Tone buttons then press the Exit button 25 vm A a 3 B a z 5 a wo 9 S 0 lt o E gt 0 gt A oe 5e ER N Before You Start Playing E Using the Main Icons You can many other screens besides the Basic screen to do things The on screen graphics that appear three dimensional work like buttons These are called Icons The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows Some screens consist on two or more pages You can display the next page or the previous page of the screen by touching these icons Ed When you select an internal song or music f files that includes the lyrics data this icon appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual E The Option Button and The Exit Button The Option Button This displays a screen for advance function settings The screen that opens differs depending on the screen that was displayed wh
124. ar power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Also do not allow lighting devices that normally are used while their light source is very close to the unit such as a piano light or powerful spotlights to shine upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of time Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensati
125. arch for Tones Tone Search You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical style You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name 1 e Press any Tone button The tone selection screen appears 2 Touch lt Search gt The following Tone search screen appears Condition Search screen Name Search screen Specify initial letter of keyword to search then touch lt Search gt y Select the type of musical instrument and musical genre Category Piano ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO Genre S Classical 7 i F POR STU UWE Yz Eu Nane Search ER Search Touch here to switch these screens Searching by Conditions Va xA Touch lt Category gt or lt Genre gt then use the dial to select the search In condition search tones conditions satisfying all of the selected search criteria are sought 4 Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch the tone name to select the tone After selecting the tone press the Exit button several times to return to the tone selection screen Searching by Tone Name 3 Touch lt By Name gt Touch lt By Key gt to go to the condition search screen 4 Decide which character is to be used for the search The selected character appears in the middle of the screen Enter the character you re searching for For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the avai
126. ation that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects in addition to the General MIDI 1 specification XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone generator However keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects s 2 pu ddy 217 DIGITAL PIANO Date Sep 1 2005 Model KR117 KR115 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 00 Function Basic Default Channel Changed e Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Messages x Mode 3 4 M 1 Altered KR KKK RRR RIK Note 15 113 Number True Voice Seege Velocity Vote OFF After Key s Touch Ch s Pitch Bend Bank select Modulation Portamento time Data entry Volume Panpot Expression Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Portamento control Reverb Effect1 depth Chorus Effect3 depth z NRPN LSB MSB 100 101 RPN LSB MSB Prog 0 127 Change True EE EE 127 ei number 1 128 System Exclusive S O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O oOooooo0oo0o000000000 PO Song Pos Song Sel Tune System Common System Clock Real Time Commands All sound off Reset all controllers Aux Local Control Message All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset x O x lt 120 126 127 123 125 x OX Xx x x 1 Ox is
127. ayback of song data with the left pedal Pressing the pedal in rapid succession moves you back in the song the number of Repla measures equal to the number of times pay you press the pedal after which playback resumes This allows you to use the pedal to rewind quickly a useful feature when for example you want to Pedal repeatedly listen to a difficult phrase Sets the pedal function Scrolls the notation in the KR s display Pressing the center pedal scrolls to the Pagel next page Pressing the left pedal scrolls to the previous page Scrolls the notation in the external display Page Pressing the center pedal scrolls to the 8 next page Pressing the left pedal scrolls to the previous page Resolution 16th note Notes down to sixteenth notes are Sets the minimum note indicated length indicated in the 32nd note Notes down to thirty second notes are notation indicated Clef L Auto Display is switched automatically Determines whether a E treble or bass clef is G Clef G treble clef is displayed in the shown in the notation for notano the lower part F Clef F bass clef is displayed in the notation P play Clef R Auto Display is switched automatically Determines whether an tr bl otbasscl fis G Clef G treble clef is displayed in the shown in the notation for notanon the upper part F Clef F bass clef is displayed in the notation pper p play Key Auto Key is switched automatically Notation is displayed in 0 the ae x
128. be required for the notation to be displayed e The displayed notations are based on music files Priority is placed on the readability of the displayed music not on the accurate rendition of difficult high level performances Thus there may be discrepancies seen when compared with commercially available printed music The display is not intended for viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed notations or complex songs e On the notation display screen lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range displayed on the screen and may not be visible e Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the notation or change the displayed part during playback of the song MEMD Using Visual Lesson you can select practice songs suited to your skill level Additionally you can have the results your performance indicated in points and check the content in the notation Refer to the Quick Start e In some internal songs the fingering is displayed The fingering numbers shown in the screen indicate one y 401dpy gt possible fingering Ka Chord names can be displayed in some of the internal songs and recorded performances using the KR s Chord Sequencer p 143 e You can make more advanced settings for the notation by pressing the Option button No notes are shown in the notation if the selected part contains no data To change the part being displayed refer to Making Detailed Se
129. been assigned to the pedal See Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 167 Thin horizontal lines visible in the television screen While narrow horizontal lines may be visible in the television screen this is a particular characteristic of the television set and does not indicate any problem with the KR Normal pedal operation is automatically enabled when the One Touch Program Piano button is pressed p 22 The volume level of the instrument connected to Input jacks is too low Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor Poor quality of images displayed in television Even when all recommended settings are used images may still not be displayed well with the television set you are using images may not match the screen size and may be clustered towards the center of the screen No sound is heard Unable to read from write to external memory Are you using optional Roland memory Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non Roland memory products Low hum coming from external device Do you have different external devices plugged into different power outlets When connecting external devices always draw power from the same outlet Remote Control not functioning No data from the remote control is received when the R
130. ble Music Styles Style Converter Style Composer Melody Intelligence 24 types lt User Programs gt Internal 36 External Memory Max 99 sets lt Metronome gt Tempo Quarter note 10 500 Beat 2 2 0 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 3 8 6 8 9 8 12 8 Volume 10 levels Metronome Pattern 11 patterns Metronome Sound 8 types lt Composer gt Tracks 5 tracks 16 tracks Note Storage Approx 30 000 notes Resolution 120 ticks per quarter notes Recording Method Realtime Replace Mix Auto Punch In Manual Punch In Loop Tempo Step Chord Sequencer Beat Map Edit Copy Quantize Delete Insert Erase Transpose Part Exchange Note Edit PC Edit Other Functions Touch the Notes Replay Pedal Super Tones Piano Designer Visual Lesson Wonderland Game Demo Tone Audition Panel Lock User Image Display BMP Export V LINK IR function Slide Show A V Sync Output Input 219 sooipueddy KA o K E Q a a lt Main Specifications KR117M KR115M KR115 lt External Storage gt USB Flash Memory Playable Software Song Standard MIDI Files Format 0 1 Roland Original Format i Format Music Style MSA MSD MSE Audio File WAV Format 44 1 kHz 16 bits linear stereo Save Song Standard MIDI Files Format 0 Roland Original Format i Format Musi
131. buttons 9 1 e Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group You ll see that button s indicator light up The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group vou ve selected Superior Grd 2 NaturalGrand 3 Vintage EP 4 Natural Hps Vibraphone Search Effects Audition This screen is called the Tone selection screen Tones indicated by Ex is called an EX voice These voices are especially recommended Tones indicated by mark is the 88 key multisampled piano tone Tones indicated by the red EX or mark produce the Key Off Sound What Key Off Sound does is recreate the tonal changes produced when the fingers are released from the keys Tones indicated by the blue EX icon sound playing noises when some keys are played Playing noises refer to noises such as the sound of guitar strings as they are rubbed and other sounds that enhance realism in performance expression Tones indicated by GS is GS tones Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and display other tones Touch the page icons i2 lt a to change pages You can touch lt Audition gt for an audio demonstration of a particular tone 28 Chapter 1 Performance You can touch the scroll bar and drag up and down to scroll through the list You can touch lt Effects gt to add effect sounds to a variety of tones p 46 You can do s
132. c Style MSE lt Internal Memory gt Internal Songs Song Search by terms and by letters Over 190 songs User Memory Max 200 songs on Favorites Max 99 User Styles Max 70 User Program Sets User Image Internal x 1 External x 1 lt Others gt Rated Power Output 70Wx4 70W x2 20 cm x 2 16 cm x 2 Speakers Sein Bene 20 cm x 2 5 cm x 2 Display Bouncing Beat Indicator Graphical Color LCD 320 x 240 dot backlit LCD Notation Grand staff G Clef staff F Clef staff with note name lyrics chords fingering Language English Japanese German French Spanish Lyrics Yes built in external display One Touch Program One Touch Piano One Touch Arranger Pedals Damper Pedal half pedal recognition Soft Pedal half pedal recognition functions assignable Sostenuto Pedal functions assignable Vocal Effects Echo Voice Transformer Vocal Keyboard Harmonist USB memory connector FDD connector Output jacks L Mono R Input jacks L Mono R Mic Input jack Headphones jack Stereo x 2 MIDI In connector x 2 MIDI Out connector USB connector Connectors Ext Display connector 15 pin D Sub type Video Out jack Expression Pedal jack Balanced Output jacks L R XLR Level Fixed Aux Output jacks L Mono R Aux Input jacks L R Serial connector KR115M KR117M only Power Supply AC 115 V AC 117 V AC 220 V AC 230 V AC 240 V 50 60 Hz
133. cables sold separately Play the sounds from the connected device through the speakers on the KR If the output of the connected device is monaural you must use the L Mono jack You cannot use the KR to adjust the volume of the connected sound generating device About the Output jack This instrument is equipped with balanced XLR type jacks Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below Make connections after first checking the wiring diagrams of other equipment you intend to connect COLD E Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections Playing Sounds from the KR Through the Speakers on Audio Equipment or Recording Your Performances on a Recording Device KR s Jack Panel Rear Aux Output Balanced Out Fixed R L 10 dBu ie ae GND R L Mono R L Mono Input O H Bsp Input R L Line In Aux In Main Output 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device you re about to connect 192 2 Turn off the power to the KR and other connected equipment 3 Use audio cables sold separately to make the connection 4 Switch on the KR e Switch on the connected device 6 Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected device e You can adjust the volume of
134. cedure to set the Aux Input jack assignments when using these jacks 2 3 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears Touch lt L gt lt L gt to switch the page then touch lt AUX Input gt The following screen will appear A U Sune DD re DI GIS Sunc Level Touch the lt Mode gt Ki to change the type of the AUX Input Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices Indication Description Off The Aux Input jacks cannot be used Select this setting when connecting an Stereo SC MD player or similar device Select this setting when inputting MIDI encoded signals AIN Syne The type of encoded signal is determined automatically AN Sync Select this setting when inputting MIDI Type A encoded signals AN Synce If the A V Sync setting is not correct Type B set this to Type A or Type B 4 Touch the lt Sync gt or the lt Level gt This is set to Off at the factory gt When A V Sync is selected the KR automatically distinguishes the type of the encoded signal then starts playing In some cases however it doesn t play correctly In such cases press lt Reset gt If playback still doesn t occur correctly set Mode to either A V Sync Type A or A V Sync Type B Tf both the A V Sync output and AUX input are connected simultaneously please set Mode of the Aux input to O
135. ch lt Equalizer gt The Equalizer screen appears 3 Adjust the equalizer 4 Touch lt Write gt The settings are stored Even after editing the settings you can touch lt User gt to select the stored settings 45 Chapter 1 Performance Applying Effects to the Sound Effects Va You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the For more on the effect types keyboard refer to the Effects List p 209 1 e First press the Tone button to select a Tone p 28 The Tone selection screen appears 2 Then touch lt Effects gt The Effects screen appears Applying Effects to the Sound 3 Touch lt ON gt The effect selected with lt Type gt will be applied Selecting the Type of Effect You may find effects not being 4 Touch lt Type gt to select the type of effect applied to certain parts when different effects are applied to Setting the Effect the upper tone layer tone and The parameters that can be set change according to the type selected in Step 4 lower tone in s chinstances you can select which effect is 5 e Touch for the parameter being set to select the value to have priority p 179 You can also move the slider with the dial Press the Exit button to return to the Tone selection screen Cancelling the Effect 6 On the Effects screen touch lt OFF gt 46 Chapter 1 Performance Adding Ef
136. chord and the black and white key to the left of the root 163 Chapter 10 Various Settings Placing a Marker in the Changing the Settings for the e Middle of a Measure Count A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected gt For detailed information about count refer to Match the measure but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a Tempo Before You Begin Playing Count In p 96 and position partway through a measure Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro gt For detailed information about Marker refer to Setting Countdown p 67 Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 98 1 Press the Count Marker button 1 Press the Count Marker button The Count screen p 96 appears The Count screen appears 2 Touch lt Marker gt The Marker screen appears 3 Press the Option button Resolution Count In down Countdown Countdown Rode Sound Track Parameter Name Value Count In add a count before the 4 Touch lt Resolution gt to choose the marker setting performance EEY Count Mode Countdown l t Explanat EH e Specify what type of count add a count only before Measure This lets you place a marker at the will be added you begin playing beginning of the measure Count In down This lets you place a marker at the add both a count in and a Beat oe beginning of the beat countdown Countdown So
137. cording Stops p 111 An ending plays then the Automatic Accompaniment and recording stop at the same time Listening to the Recorded Performance 8 Press the ma Reset button then press the m Play Stop button The recorded performance plays back When you press the m Play Stop button playback stops 107 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Track buttons assignments for recorded performances Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are assigned to the track buttons as shown below Track button Performance Recorded R Rhythm The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is recorded here In addition drum sets and effect sounds that are selected with the keys in a performance are recorded to this track 1 Whole When using Piano Style accompaniment p 72 the performance played on the keyboard is recorded here 2 Bass Accomp The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and accompaniment part are recorded here 3 Lower When the KR is set so that sounds from performances on the left hand side of the keyboard are played while the Automatic Accompaniment sounds p 71 your own performance on the left hand side of the keyboard is recorded here 4 Upper Your own performance on the right hand side of the keyboard is recorded here 108 Va Music Styles are composed of eight parts For de
138. creen After changing this setting try selecting the song once again For more detailed information about selecting a song refer to Playing a Song p 75 183 OoLaidou3 Chapter 10 Various Settings MEMO 184 Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices You can connect the KR to external devices such as audio equipment MIDI instruments and computer O Connecting an External Display or Television You can connect a computer monitor or other external display or a television to the KR enabling you to display the Song Select screen your favorite images song lyrics and notations on a larger screen O Connecting Video Equipment p 187 With a V LINK compatible device connected you can switch images with the keyboard OConnecting MIDI Devices p 188 You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance data from the KR or play performance data from the KR on the sequencer Also when you connect a MIDI sound module you can perform on the KR and hear the sounds played through the MIDI sound module O Connecting Audio Equipment p 191 The KR has high quality built in stereo speakers but you can also hook it up a stereo system for an even more impressive sound You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording equipment and record your performances O Connecting a Computer p 195 You can use a sequencer program to record performance data from the KR and play performance data from
139. d s Split Point Split Pointiin aaea aE 162 Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Conte 162 Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure 164 Changing the Settings for the Count 00 164 Other Settings en 165 PROCOA ULE s et Eeer EE EE 165 Changing the Tuning Tuning ss ss122 221 166 Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions csscsescresseresserenseseneosens 167 Changing the Bend Range Pedal Setting 169 Changing Standard Pitch Master Tune 170 Changing the Language Language 170 Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays User Image Dieplax sessssssssssrtssssesstssserste gt 170 Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On Opening Message 171 Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off Memory Backup 171 Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset ccccccccecccceseseseeceeeeeecseees 172 Changing the Functions of the Remote Control s Buttons cccceccccceceteneesesneneenees 172 Changing the Infrared Transmission Function Gettmngs 174 Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Seretan A 175 Changing the Part That Makes the Keys Move Only for Instrument Equipped with Moving Ke 175 Changing the CD Settings Only for Instrument Equipped with CD Drive 177 Setting the Type of CD To Be Played Back 177 Showing a
140. d or the part whose settings are to be changed The button for the selected part changes color lt 1 gt lt 16 gt This Part to be played back This part is selected Movement The Part not to be played back Muted Part Parts that do not have performance data recorded to them Solo Only the selected Part is played back This allows you to prevent the sound for the Mute selected part from playing The performance data for the selected part is Clear deleted This displays the Part Settings screen in which Part you can make detailed settings for each part For details refer to p 137 The Tone Set screen appears For details refer Tone Set top 138 E Modifying the Settings of Each Part You can change the Tones and volume as well as mute the playback for each individual part in songs recorded with the 16 track Sequencer and the internal songs gt Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are also made up of 16 Parts you can change the settings for the individual Parts and play them back in the same way First select the song for which the settings are to be made p 75 1 Display the 16 track Sequencer screen p 136 2 Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want to make settings Change the settings for the selected Part EI When you touch lt Clear gt a message asking you to confirm the deletion appears To era
141. d song volume levels Check out Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance p 73 97 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly you can then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures E Placing a Marker within a Song You can place two separate markers Marker A and Marker B in one song These markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of a section of music Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same place as many times as you like You can add markers or move to a marker even while playback is in progress Access the Marker Screen First select the song in which you ll set the markers p 75 1 e Press the Count Marker button q ke Q a ie lt V 2 Touch lt Marker gt The Marker screen appears 27108 E Sonate No 15 4 4 M 52 gt _E p Repeat a O KI gt gt a RI Le La Clear Clear Placing Markers 3 e Goto the measure where you want to set a marker using the aa Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons 4 Touch lt gt for Marker A 4 108 M Sonate No 15 4 4 M 52 P a ne E gt Repeat a kill lt gt Bel lt i Clear Clear 93 You cannot place markers in audio files and in audio CDs Chapter 4 Practice Functions
142. d by the keyboard when it is played No sound produced Sound Generator Local Off NM a gt When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series you don t need to switch off Local Control MT units transmit Local Off messages when their power is switched on First turn on the power to the KR then after a few moments play a note on the KR when you turn on the power to the MT Series device Local Off is automatically enabled for the KR Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices E Sending Tone Change Messages Program Change Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB A Program Change is a message that means change to the Tone of the specified number The device that receives this changes to the Tone of the corresponding number When you choose a Program Change message Program Number the Program Number will be transmitted to the MIDI device connected to the KR The MIDI device that receives the Program Number changes the tone to the corresponding Program Number Normally the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available Some MIDI devices however have more than 128 Tones With such devices the Tone is selected through a combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select messages There are two parts of a Bank Select message the MSB Controller 0 with a value of 0 127 and the LSB Controller 32 with a value of 0 127 Some MIDI instruments can t handle Bank
143. de which character you ll use for the search The selected character appears in the middle of the screen Enter the character you are searching for For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A 3 B 3 C Touch lt A 0 gt to toggle between alphabets and numerals 5 e Touch lt Search gt The search results appear on the display Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style Press the Exit button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen 62 em Only the KR s internal Music Styles are searchable Va In a condition search the KR looks for Music Styles satisfying all of the selected search criteria Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Selecting Music Styles on External Memories You can play other User Styles saved to external memories sold separately or User memory p 158 560600 o 4 108 EBMarchinoBand 4 4 8 __1_MarchinoBand a 2 Kids 3 Kids Dance 4 Holiday 1 5 Quiet Waltz vn mp BA pri M ER Search 2 Touch lt User gt in the lower left of the screen When you touch lt User gt on the lower part of the screen the screen for selecting user memory or external memory Styles appears Touching lt Preset gt in the lower left of this screen returns you to the screen for selecting the Trad World accompaniment Styles 3 Touch lt
144. drop Also before opening the top make sure that no one is in the path of the top as it is opened CAUTION Do not move the piano with the top in the open position The top stick may disengage from the socket causing the top to fall To close the top reverse the opening procedure Raising the Music Rest KR117 1 Open the front top 2 Hold the music rest with both hands then raise it forward 3 Place the music rest prop at the rear of the music rest into a slot KRI15 1 Gently raise the music rest then secure it in place as shown in the figure 2 To collapse the stand fold in the metal fittings while supporting the stand with both hands and gently fold down the stand 19 HA Q B Q z gt Q NO aioieg 22 0 gt A S 5 o ER wn Before You Start Playing E Using the Music Holders KR115 You can use the holders to hold pages in place When not using the holders leave them folded down Installing Batteries in the Remote Control Install the batteries provided in the remote control Remote Control s Rear Remote Control s Cover 1 Open the battery cover on the back of the remote control 2 Insert the supplied AA batteries as shown in the figure of remote control 3 Close the battery cover Be careful to observe the correct polarity direction when installing the batteries Va For more information on
145. e such as the C3 key on a keyboard was pressed for this amount of time using this amount of force By connecting the external memory to the external memory port on the KR the performance information is sent from the external memory to the piano and played faithfully by the piano This is different than a CD since the music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself This makes it possible to erase certain parts or to change instruments tempos and keys freely allowing you to use it in many different ways Regarding Copyright Other than for your own personal enjoyment any use of the song data programmed in this instrument without the consent of the copyright holder is prohibited by law Additionally this data must not be copied nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder E The KR allows you to use the following music files Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series or Roland Piano Digital HP G R and KR Series instrument Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files Roland s original music file is made specifically for practicing the piano Some follow an instructional curriculum allowing for a complete range of lessons such as practicing each hand separately or listening to only the accompaniment SMF Music Files 720KB 1 44MB format SMFs Standard MIDI Files use a standard format for music file that was formulated so that files containing music
146. e touch screen or the dial When you have decided on a Style press the Exit button to display the Style Composer screen 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each Part Deciding on a Style 7 Touch lt Execute gt You have created a new Style The User Style is recorded to the Music Style User button Try playing with the new Style If you turn off the power or record a new User Style any User Style you ve previously recorded is lost If you do not want to delete the Style save it to an external memory or to user memory Take a look at Saving a User Style p 158 O Muting Parts for a Particular Division You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific Divisions For example all parts are played when you use a Variation accompaniment pattern whereas if you select the Original accompaniment pattern every part other than Accompaniment 1 is muted With this arrangement when the accompaniment pattern changes from the original to the variation it creates a more elaborate effect in the accompaniment gt For more on Divisions refer to the Style Arrangements p 155 1 Touch the Style Composer screen to choose the Part you want to mute out 2 Press the Fill In To Variation or To Original button to switch to the division that you want to mute 3 Touch lt Mute gt on the screen The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you selected Chapter
147. e Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Power Kick2 Elec Kick 2 TR 909 Kick TR 808 Kick 2 36 Power Kick1 Elec Kick 1 TR 808 Kick HipHop BD1 JE Side Stick 2 Side Stick 2 TR 808 Rimshot Side Stick 2 38 Dance Snare1 Elec Snare 1 TR 808 Snare 1 Power Snare 2 CERN og Clap TR 808 Clap TR 808 Clap TR 808 Clap 40 Power Snare 1 Elec Snare 2 TR 909 Snare 1 Elec Snare 3 41 Power Low Tom 2 Elec Low Tom 2 TR 808 Low Tom 2 Elec Low Tom 2 E Closed Hi hat4 EXC1 Closed Hi hat3 EXC1 TR 808 CHH EXC1 CR 78 CHH EXC1 43 Power Low Tom 1 Elec Low Tom 1 TR 808 Low Tom 1 Elec Low Tom 1 E Pedal Hi hat 2 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 2 EXC1 TR 808 CHH EXC1 TR 808 CHH EXC1 45 Power Mid Tom 2 Elec Mid Tom 2 TR 808 Mid Tom 2 Elec Mid Tom 2 i OpenHi hat4 EXC1 OpenHi hat3 EXC1 TR 808OHH EXC1 CR 78 OHH EXC1 Power Mid Tom 1 Elec Mid Tom 1 TR 808 Mid Tom 1 Elec Mid Tom 1 48 Power High Tom 2 Elec High Tom 2 TR 808 High Tom 2 Elec High Tom 2 E Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 TR 808 Cymbal Crash Cymbal 1 50 Power High Tom 1 Elec High Tom 1 TR 808 High Tom 1 Elec High Tom 1 RM Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 52 Chinese Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Reverse Cymbal 53 Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell EE Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine 55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal ER Cowbell Cowbell TR 808 Cowbell TR 808 Cowbell 57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 a Vibra slap V
148. e Style Pop Ballad Oldies BigBand Latin Trad Rock Acoustic Country Swing Gospel World SOO0008 Basic Advanced Full To Variation To Original Select the accompaniment pattern Division 1 Use the dial to move the cursor to the input position Use the lt lt Bwd and kk Fwd buttons to move the cursor one measure at a time 2 Enter the chord progression and the changes in the accompaniment pattern and arrangement Just as when performing with Automatic Accompaniment press the keys to specify a chord and press a button to select the accompaniment pattern p 68 You can change the Style Orchestrator with the Performance Pads p 69 3 Touch lt Ins gt once to insert one measure before the measure where the cursor is currently positioned If you touch lt Del gt the measure where the cursor is currently positioned is deleted while the measures that follow are moved forward To remove what you have input move the cursor to the position with input you want to delete then touch lt Clear gt This deletes the entered setting gt You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song When you add an intro the number of bars corresponding to the length of the intro is inserted automatically 144 Functions That Can Be Assigned to the Pedals and the Performance Pads gt For instructions on assigning functions refer to Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal
149. e Touch Program Piano button 2 Press the Option button 3 Touch lt V LINK gt 4 e Touch lt ON gt Switches to Image Control mode You can control images using the twelve keys at the left end of the keyboard When V LINK is on V LINK is indicated in the Basic screen and other screens While V LINK is switched on no sound is produced when you press any of the twelve keys at the left end of the keyboard l l l l l A0 G1 5 Touch lt OFF gt to cancel the V LINK function 187 Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices Connecting MIDI Devices By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging performance data you can control one device from the other For instance you can output sound from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument What s MIDI MIDI short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface was developed as a universal standard for the exchange of performance data between electronic instruments and computers The KR is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange performance data with external devices These connectors can be used to connect the KR to an external device for even greater versatility E Connectors MIDI Out In MIDI Out Connector Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable sold separately Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a pedal is se
150. e player piano CDs e CD ROMs containing saved SMF music files e CD included with the KR e Player piano CDs e CDs created with the A V Sync function p 122 77 Chapter 3 Song Playback Insert the CD in the CD Drive 1 e Press the eject button and open a disc tray Disc Tray Eject Button 2 Put a CD on a disc tray 3 Press the eject button again to close the disc tray Removing a CD 1 e Press the eject button and open a disc tray 2 Remove the CD from the disc tray If a disc tray does not open If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive such as due to a power failure the disc tray cannot be opened by pressing the eject button In this case you can insert a piece of wire to force the tray open Emergency Eject Hole Make sure the KR s power has been turned OFF before attempting to engage the emergency eject hole If you insert something while the power is on the disc could be damaged or unexpected problems may occur 78 Chapter 3 Song Playback Playing Back Songs on CDs You can play back the CD included with the KR CDs with player piano CDs audio CDs and CD ROMs to which SMF music files are saved 1 e Place the CD you want to play in the CD drive If there is any song data 2 Touch lt gt lt gt to select CD as the genre already recorded a screen appears asking you to confirm If using the remote control press the remote control s EXTERNAL butto
151. e sure to discharge any static electricity from your own body before handling the external memories Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the contact portion of the external memories e Do not bend drop or subject cards to strong shock or vibration Do not keep cards in direct sunlight in closed vehicles or other such locations storage temperature 0 to 50 C e Do not allow cards to become wet e Do not disassemble or modify the external memories When connecting external memory make sure to press it until it is fully inserted Insert the external memory in the External Memory port evenly and without undue force Forcing the external memory may damage the External Memory port Do not insert any object other than the external memory e g wires coins other types of disks etc in the External Memory port This may damage the External Memory port Do not subject the External Memory port cover or connected External memory to excessive stress Close the external memory cover when using the External memory for extended periods Handling CD ROMs Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner GS G is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation XG lite Xa is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation Mac OS is a trademark of App
152. e unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets Before using this unit make sure to read the instruc tions below and the Owner s Manual Connect mains plug of this model to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Infor mation page Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts S Never use or store the unit in places that are e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct L i sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generating equipment or are Mav IN e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Humid or are e Exposed to rain or are e Dusty or are e Subject to high levels of vibration Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces The unit should be connected to a power supply only o
153. ea Each time power to the keyboard is turned on the split point is reset to F 3 Split Point Acoustic Bass At the Basic screen touch lt Split gt dJ 138 EBPop 1 Upper Lauer Acoust ic Bs The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right hand section of the keyboard and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left hand section of the keyboard Here the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the upper tone and the tone appearing at the left part of the display is called the lower tone You can turn the tones on and off by touching lt Lower 1 gt or lt Lower 2 gt Changing the Tones 2 Touch the name of the tone to be changed 3 Press a Tone button to select the tone p 28 4 When you have selected the tone press the Exit button The display returns to the Basic screen Cancelling the Split 5 e Touch lt Split gt 32 The lt Split gt icons are dimmed and the Split performance is cancelled When you play the keys only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded MEMD You can change the split point refer to Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point p 162 EMD When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data lt Lyrics gt appears in the Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics em Q gt appears in the Piano screen or
154. earches for tones according to search parameters or by name by touching lt Search gt p 30 2 Touch a tone name to select the tone You ll hear the tone you ve selected when you play the keyboard You can use the dial to scroll through the screen as you switch the Tones to be played 3 e Press the Exit button This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen E Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal sounds 1 e Press the Super Tones button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt gt Jet several times to display the Drums screen or the SFX SOUND EFFECT screen Touch here to switch these screens SFX screen SOUD EFFECT Fa Lee SPOS Tala Drums screen Touch the screen to play sounds Touch the icons on the screen to play sounds Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound MEMO You can also have play sounds by touching the screen The combination of sounds assigned to the keyboard You can select other drum tones by pressing the lt al gt or lt gt gt buttons varies according to the drum set Take a look at the Drum 3 Press the Exit button several times Set List p 205 and SFX Set p 208 This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen 29 Chapter 1 Performance E Using Keywords to Se
155. ececececeseceesetetesesesees 136 BaSi Screen vies in a tekst teases 25 58 Chord Sequencer screen c cececccsceeseeteneeseseeteneees 143 Copy SONG screen eseseseeceesesteteseececesesesesneneneneees 120 Copy Style screen ceeseseeceseeeseteseeeeteesesesnaneneneees 160 Copy User Programs sereen ccceeee eee eeeeeees 133 Count Settings SCreen ecccccccce cscs ceteesesesteteneseees 96 Countdown Settings Screen ccecceeeseeesteteteseees 67 Delete Song screen eseeeceeeeseteseseeceesesestaneneneees 119 Delete Style screen onnieke eise 159 Delete User Program screen cccceeeeie eee 133 Effects scree teg Sege EECHER AE 46 Equalizer screetin ner on eiie a 44 45 Fil scdreen aere 114 after e EE 165 Load User Program screen c cccccceeceneteeseenenes 132 Market screen eet iia oine 98 Melody Intelligence screen cccccseceeeteeesteteees 70 Metronome screen e 54 MIDI Setting Screen cceseceseseececeseseeeeeseseenenenes 189 Notation Screen ciscieoetitecsecduedaansacenmariates 87 Part Balance screen sntiasa 73 IN OR 134 PIANO Screen e cccscesdec NEESS abe iieis 25 27 Program Change Screen cccccccceseseeceneesestenenes 189 Rec Mode screen o ccseecsseseseeteteseeeeteteeeeeeseseseeneenes 140 Rename screen 00 eeeeecceessseceseceesseeeesseeees 117 130 158 Reverb serech nihke pponta 34 Dave Dong screen isse ei nA 116 Save StyleScreen ea eana nean 158 Save User Program screen cceccsccee
156. ect a external equipment here 17 gt P 0 gt A oe A ft ER A Before You Start Playing Opening and Closing the Top KR117 Opening only the front top A WARNING Children must not be permitted to open or close the top on their own adult supervision is required Because the top is very heavy always use two or more people when opening and closing the top and be sure to handle it carefully 1 Lift the right front the upper note side A in the figure of the board with both hands fold it back and then lay it down slowly on the top Opening both the front top and the top 2 Follow Step 1 to open the front top Then lift the right front the upper note side B in the figure of the board with both hands 18 3 While holding up the top with one hand lift up the top stick and insert its end into the appropriate top slip A CAUTION Do not move the piano with the top in the open position The top stick may disengage from the socket causing the top to fall Z WARNING When opening the top be careful not to open it too far Opening the top at an angle in excess of 30 degrees may damage the unit or cause the top to drop Also before opening the top make sure that no one is in the path of the top as it is opened About the Topsticks and Topslip The KR117 has two topsticks each a different length You can use the different topsticks to change the amount the top is left o
157. ed Prepare image data that can be used with the KR p 171 Error 30 The internal memory capacity of the KR is full Error 40 The KR cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the KR A MIDI cable has been disconnected Error 41 Connect it properly and securely A MIDI transmission error has occurred Error 43 Check the MIDI cable and connected MIDI device There may be a problem with the system Error 51 Repeat the procedure from the beginning If it is not solved after you have tried several times contact the Roland service center Error 60 Error 61 Moving Key Error Repeat the procedure from the beginning If it is not solved after you have tried several times contact the Error 62 Roland service center Error 63 Error 65 The Ext Memory port was subjected to excessive current Check the storage media to confirm that no damage has occurred to it saoipueddy 201 KA 0 4 K E 0 a a lt Piano Superior Grd NaturalGrand Vintage EP Natural Hps Vibraphone MagicalPiano EP Belle N o a A oj N ch Mallet Isle o FM E Piano 2 o 60sE Pianol Music Bell 3 N Superior Str wo Superior Pad A Superior Cho a Ariel Piano o Phase Clav 2 N FM E Piano
158. eeeteees 187 Connecting MIDI Devices ccccccccceeteeseeteneene 188 Connectors aiie Eine raii 188 Making the Connections ccceceseseseeteteeees 188 Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments MIDI Ensemble A1 189 MIDI Settings ts ccc atans sds SEENEN 189 Selecting the Transmit Channel RK EINEN 190 Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard Local Control en 190 Sending Tone Change Messages Program Change Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB cciestecsicsedeeescecgschlecesesstessbeseuscocvbevetee 191 Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device Composer MIDI Out 191 Connecting to Audio Foutpment en 191 CONNECTORS sistas its aati catia ee d 191 Making the Connections cccesceseeseeteneeees 192 Connecting External Speakers 0 0 0 194 Changing the Aux Output Jacks Settings 194 Setup Examples With Surround Set to Surround or Ensemble eene 194 Connecting a Computer 195 Connect to the MIDI Connectors cceee 195 Connect to the USB Conmector 195 Making the Settings for the USB Driver 196 Appendices ccsecceessseeeesseeees 197 Troubleshooting een 197 Error Messagen een 201 Tone LS tess eege sesh Ee EE 202 Drom Set List cassiere rdet aaber STETS 205 Effects Tiston o E ERA E ia 209 Music Style List KR117 cece 210 Music Style List OKRIIDI eccrine 211 Chord E E 212 Internal Song Lier 214 Parameters Stored to Internal Memory
159. ees 146 Deleting Measures Delete un 147 Inserting Blank Measures Unsert e 147 Transposing Individual Parts Trans pose cccctei cites dee 148 Making Measures Blank Erase 008 148 Exchanging Parts Part Exchange 149 Correcting Notes One by One Note Edit 149 Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song RG Edit craro tte coset EEE 150 Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song Beat Map EE 150 Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs 151 Changing the Tempo Within the Song 151 Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to BEE dee 151 Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure rene aita E ARa 152 Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles 153 Creating Original Styles User Styles 153 Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles Style Composer 153 Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself Style Converter 155 Saving a User Style cecccesesseceseceessseseeceesesesnenenens 158 Deleting Saved User Styles e 159 Copying Styles on External Memories to the User Memo y serons enie as isean eiin ara 160 Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to External Memories 0 0 0 0 160 Chapter 10 Various Settings 161 Changing the Settings for One Touch AIT ANCL E E ES 161 PrOCOdUPe aspan svia 161 Adjusting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch reseo ienaa ee 161 Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch E 162 Changing the Keyboar
160. emote Sensor is switched off Check p 172 No sound is heard Is the volume level of the KR p 22 or connected device turned all the way down Are headphones plugged in p 23 Has a plug remained connected to the Phones jack When headphones or plugs are connected the keyboard s speaker stops playing Has the Balance knob been moved all the way to the right or left Has the volume been set to 0 using the Part Balance p 73 Are all sliders in the Equalizer screen at the minimum level p 44 Has the footage been adjusted so that all frequency components aren t sounded p 15 in the Quick Start 197 sooipueddy KA Q 4 K E Q a a lt Troubleshooting Case Cause Remedy Case Cause Remedy No sound is heard Is the speaker cable connected and plugged in correctly Is V LINK switched on p 187 When V LINK is switched on the twelve keys at the left end of the keyboard are used to control images and no sounds are played with these keys No sound is heard when a MIDI instrument is connected Have all devices been switched on Are the MIDI cables connected correctly p 188 Does the MIDI channel match the connected instrument p 190 A loud continuous beep tone suddenly begins sounding Have you simultaneously connected devices for both the output for A V Sync and AUX input If you use
161. en the button was pressed The Exit Button Touch to cancel the settings currently being made and close the screen displayed Normally pressing the Exit button one or more times returns you to the Basic screen 26 E The Scroll Bar and The Page Icon The Song and Tone selection screens feature a scroll bar at the right of the screen list with page icons at the top and bottom of the scroll bar 4 4 M 1 PY I Sonate No 15 D n Page icon Siy ar x 2 Liebestraune 3 Scroll bar J 127 Sonate No 15 3 Etude op 10 3 4 Je te veux 5 Valse op 64 1 ER Page icon lt a gt Classical gt Ron Favorites File Touch the scroll bar and drag up and down to scroll through the list Touch the page icons D lt a to change pages Chapter 1 Performance Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano One Touch Piano You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single button Piano Arranger LL One Touch Program 1 e Press the One Touch Program Piano button Since this instrument faithfully A Piano screen like the one shown below will appear reproduces real acoustic piano action and response keys played in the top one and one half octave range continue to resonate regardless of the damper pedal action and the tone in this range is audibly different The Key Transpose setting p 102 can also be used to change t
162. en you touch lt Cancel gt the song selection screen or basic screen appears and the recorded song is not erased E Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks You can select and erase performances on specific tracks 1 e Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance you want to erase then press the Rec button The Track button s light goes dark and the recorded music is erased Changing How Recording Stops When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance you can change the accompaniment and the way recording mode stops 1 e Press the Menu button and watch the indicator light up The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears 2 Touch lt Rec Mode gt A screen like the one shown below appears Replace D Rec Stop Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance 3 Touch lt Rec Stop gt LA to switch between Arranger Stop and Composer Stop Display Explanation Recording stops at the same time the Automatic Arranger Stop Accompaniment stops Recording does not stop even when the Automatic Composer Stop Accompaniment stops When you press the gt m Play Stop button recording stops Recording Songs Starting with Pickups You can record songs that start with pickup beats songs that start on a beat other than the measure s first beat Count Sound e D e e Measure 2 PU 1 d Recording
163. er performance for the left hand 80s Rock 4 4 M 1 Superior Grd Upper Lover get ER Stopping the Sound in the Left hand 3 e Touch lt Lower 1 gt The lt Lower 1 gt icon returns to the original color To have lt Lower 2 gt play as well also touch lt Lower 2 gt The lower Tones stop playing 71 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added Piano Style Arranger Usually with Automatic Accompaniment you play chords on the left hand side of the keyboard and the melody on the right hand side Chords can also be recognized over the entire keyboard allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment without splitting the keyboard This function is called Piano Style Arranger This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song by playing chords in the ordinary way without giving any thought to the location of a keyboard split 1 e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button 2 Touch lt Split gt to turn the Split function off 1208 80s Rock 4 4 M 1 S Ad at Select a Music Style p 61 4 Play the keyboard The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard 72 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part Balance You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music
164. erms 0 0 0 Assigning Functions to the Performance Pads 1 e Press the User Function button and watch the indicator light up 94 Chapter 4 Practice Functions User Pad Setting MEMD You can also assign the Tap Tempo function to the pedal and use the pedal to specify the tempo For details refer to Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User 2 Touch Li for the Performance Pad to which the function is Functions p 167 assigned then select Tap Tempo A gt a cf 3 Press the Exit button the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the g P screen MEMD You can start the song by Specifying the Tempo giving the count through the microphone For more detailed 4 Press the Pad to which Tap Tempo is assigned at least twice information refer to Enabling the Start of Songs and The tempo is set to the song you used when tapping the button S i Automatic Accompaniment with the Sound of Your Voice Vocal Count In p 50 E Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo Tempo Mute If a song has tempo changes it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo Overriding tempo changes is called Tempo Muting 1 e Hold down the m Play Stop button and press one of the Tempo buttons When tempo muting is in effect the tempo display appears in reverse video Natur air and When you play back the
165. es some parts may have no tone assigned for each individual part are played or not solo and mute If the Following Message Appears If you try to display another screen after vou ve changed the song s settings for each Part a message like the one below may appear D Q H H VI Song setup was modified change original setup Ks Touch lt OK gt to change the song s settings Touch lt Cancel gt to discard the changes you re made 138 E Recording a Performance O Start Recording Selecting the Part to Record 1 Display the 16 track Sequencer screen p 136 2 Touch the number for the Part you want to record The button for the touched part being set turns orange You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on Part D 10 or Part S 11 You can select drum sets or effect sounds by selecting Part D 10 or Part S 11 and touching lt Drum Set gt Selecting the Sound to Play 3 Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play After selecting a Tone press the Exit button to call up the 16 Track Sequencer screen Recording the Performance 4 Press the Reset button Recording will start at the beginning of the song If you want to record from a point other than the beginning use the lt q Bwd and gt Fwd buttons to select another measure to begin 5 Press the Rec button and watch the indicator is light up The KR is put in recording sta
166. es for a brilliant sparkling sound Flat All slider values are set to 0 User Store your own preferred settings p 45 44 Chapter 1 Performance 4 Touch the slider to make adjustment Settings Value Explanation Displayed Low frequency range This is the range of Low 60 0 60 frequencies for instruments like drums bass organ guitar and strings Mid low frequency range This is the range of 60 0 60 frequencies for lower brass and woodwind instruments Mid 60 0 60 Midrange This is the range of frequencies where most instrument sounds are concentrated Mid high frequency range The ear is most 60 0 60 Bee sensitive to this frequency range High 60 0 60 High frequency range These frequencies add brilliance to the sound You can temper the distortion in the sound by Master Level 60 0 60 lowering the level Raising the level too much may cause the sound to become distorted You can also move the slider with the dial When you press the Exit button the equalization is placed in effect and you return to the previous screen Cancelling the Effect 5 e Touch lt Flat gt O Storing the Settings You can store adjusted equalizer settings to lt User gt Even after editing the settings you can touch lt User gt to call up your preferred settings 1 e Press the Sound Control button and watch the indicator light up 2 e Tou
167. es out The next time you press the Transpose button illuminating the indicator the music is transposed by the value set here Example Playing a song in E major while playing the keys for C major In this example C is the root note in the key of C major E the root of E major is the third in C major It is up four keys including the black keys so touch x enter 4 for the setting OUT 103 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance You can easily record performances using the five track buttons A recorded performance can be played back to listen to your own playing or to add additional parts You can use the KR to make the following kinds of recordings e Recording just your own keyboard performance Recording a New Song New Song p 105 e Recording performances using Automatic Accompaniment Recording With Accompaniment p 107 e Recording along with the internal songs and songs on external memories Recording Along with a Song p 109 e Re recording Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 110 O If the Following Screen Appears If you ve recorded a song or changed a songs settings see p 137 the following message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song OK to delete Song Are you sure St een Kg If it s okay to delete the song touch lt OK gt If you do not want to delete
168. ession Erases Expression volume change information Event Lyric Erases only lyrics E Exchanging Parts Part Exchange You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part with the notes recorded for another part This process of exchanging parts is called part exchange At Step 3 of Selecting the Editing Function p 145 select lt Part Exchange gt A screen like the one shown below appears Part Exchange Execute to choose Parts you want to exchange E Correcting Notes One by One Note Edit You can make corrections in a recorded performance one note at a time This process of making changes in individual notes is called note editing You can make these corrections by using note editing e Deleting misplayed notes e Changing the scale of a single note e Changing the force used in playing a single key velocity e Change the finger number At Step 3 of Selecting the Editing Function p 145 select lt Note Edit gt A screen like the one shown below appears Note Edit Part 1 HI Note Uelo Finger Location Pitch Velocity Finger Number The note location display uses Measure Beat Tick as the format A tick is a unit of time that s shorter than a beat Touch L L to select the part with the note to be corrected The Part number appears at the top of the screen Use the lt lt Bwd button and the gt Fwd butto
169. f actions just by touching the screen lightly The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger Pressing hard or using a hard object can damage the touch screen Be careful not to press too hard and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the touch screen The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced due to changes in the surrounding environment and over time If this happens follow the steps in Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen p 175 to correct the pointer position Do not place items on the touch screen E Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen To adjust the contrast of the screen turn the Contrast knob located at the right side of the screen Ka Contrast Kaes 2 pina on SES tee ie E OOOOOO oo EO O Main Screens E Piano Screen Immediately after the power is turned on the Piano screen like the one below is displayed For details refer to p 27 47108 E Basic Screen The following screen is called Basic screen Song name or Tempo Music Style name Beat Measure NaturalGrand The Tone names are selected appear These information are displayed when you use the automatic accompaniment CEMA You can usually display this screen by pressing Exit button several times Follow either of the procedures described below to display it e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button The Basic screen
170. f the type described in the operating instruc AN tions or as marked on the bottom of unit About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING 22 22222037 227 5 Use only the attached power supply cord Also the supplied power cord must not be used with any Q other device Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the S cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of
171. f time e Ifa battery has leaked use a soft piece of cloth or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the discharge from the battery compartment Then install new batteries To avoid inflammation of the skin make sure that none of the battery discharge gets onto your hands or skin Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the discharge gets near your eyes Immediately rinse the affected area with running water if any of the discharge has entered the eyes e Never keep batteries together with metallic objects such as ballpoint pens necklaces hairpins etc Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that may be observed in the region in which you live Be careful when opening closing the lid so you do not get your fingers pinched p 20 Adult super vision is recommended whenever small children use the unit D Always keep the following parts including with the KR and small components that may be removed out Q of the reach of small children to avoid accidental ingestion of these parts Included Parts e Piano leg washers Bolts washers and springs used in attaching the pedals e Cord clamps used for securing pedal cords other cord clamps using double sided tape and cord clamp attachment screws e Pedal stay securing screws Removable parts e USB memory anti theft lock iron plate Anti theft lock securing screw IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the item
172. fects to Mic Vocals Vocal Effect With a microphone connected you can add effects to the microphone vocals em For details on connecting a microphone refer to Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as Vocal Effect Connecting a Microphone p 23 O How to select Vocal Effect Vocal Effects E 1 e Press the Vocal Effects button The Vocal Effects screen appears Vocal Effects Vocal Count In Vocal Keyboard MEMD 2 Touch any one of the icons ouch any one of the icons If your KR features a built in CD drive you can play back Icon Explanation Page the included CD and add vocal Echo Adjusts the microphone echo p 48 effects to vocal parts on CDs Transformer Alters the microphone vocals p 48 Harmonist Adds harmonies to the original voice p 49 Vocal Count In Allows you to start songs and Automatic p 50 Accompaniment using your own tempo forming to th Vocal Keyboard SE to produce sounds conforming to the p 51 Music Files You can play a specific part as harmony while p 52 You can adjust the microphone playing back a song volume with the Mic Volume knob on the left underside of the KR 3 When you press the Exit button the effect is applied and you return to the previous screen 47 Chapter 1 Performance Cancelling the Vocal Effect 4 Press the Vocal Effects button and
173. ff If this is set to anything other than Off make sure to disconnect any cables connected to Aux Out or Balanced Out If such connections are left intact you may likely encounter a loud continuous beep tone the setting Indication Setting Description Adjust this value if the keyboard performance is not synchronized properly with other audio data with the type set to A V syne Sync 0 100 This adjusts the level for the device connected to the Aux Input jacks Level 0 128 If the level is set to 0 only keyboard performance sound from the device connected to the Aux Input jacks will be heard 5 Press the Exit button 193 Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices Connecting External Speakers E Setup Examples With Surround EE Set to Surround or You can connect external speakers and have what is played vi a on the keyboard be output through the KR s speakers while Ensem ble the accompaniment is played through the connected external The piano sound is played through the KR s speaker and the speakers surround sound is played through the external speaker Spacious Location E Changing the Aux Output Jacks Settings Piano Sound 1 Press the Surround Reverb button Speaker F Speaker 2 Touch the lt Surround gt Advanced 3D Surround Cit 3 Touch the Type icon to select the type Indication Description Se
174. ffl 23 Euro Ballad 24 Guitar Trio 25 Midnight Bld 26 Pop Ballad 27 Piano Pop 28 Love Songs 29 12 8 Ballad 30 Scat Ballad 31 60s Ballad 32 Torch Song 1 33 Torch Song 2 34 Strings 35 8BeatBallad1 36 8BeatBallad2 37 Fireside 38 Piano Ballad 39 Story Ballad 40 SimpleBallad 41 ClassicBalad 42 Symph Ballad 43 R 8 Beat 1 44 R 8 Beat 2 45 R 16 Beat 1 46 R 16 Beat 2 47 R 16 Beat 3 48 R 16 Beat 4 49 R Afro amp Swing 50 R 5BeatSwing 51 R Shuffle 52 R Waltz 53 R March 54 R 5 Beat 55 R 7 Beat 56 P Pop1 57 P Classic 1 58 P Night 59 P Bossa Nova 60 P Ragtime 61 P Classic 2 62 P Ballad 2 63 P Swing Pop 64 P Rock nRoll 65 P Concerto 1 66 P Concerto 2 67 P Swing 68 P Shuffle 69 P Boogie 70 P 50s Rock 71 P Latin 2 GtrUnplugged 3 Movie Ballad 210 Oldies Country 24 Big Band 2 Trad World 25 Jazz Ballad 1 Guitar Lady 26 LooseBigBand 1 OrchMariachi 2 EasySlowRock 27 Smooth Jazz 2 Orch Polka 3 CountryFox 2 28 A Cappella 3 Boston Waltz 4 Country Gtr 29 Scat Swing 4 Euro Pop 5 Easy Country 30 Organ Swing 5 F
175. file could be widely compatible regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device An enormous variety of music is available whether it be for listening for practicing musical instruments for Karaoke etc If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files please consult the retailer where you purchased your KR SMF with Lyrics SME SMF with Lyrics refers to SMF Standard MIDI File that contains the lyrics When Music Files carrying the SMF with Lyrics logo are played back on a compatible device one bearing the same logo the lyrics will appear in its display E About the KR Sound Generator The KR come equipped with GM 2 GS sound generators GENERAL General MIDI M The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance mini General MIDI 2 The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off offering enhanced expressive capabilities and even greater compatibility Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations such as how sounds are
176. ft touch the name of the tone you ve selected Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen NaturalGrand 2 Vintage EP 3 FM E Piano 4 Natural Hps Vibraphone Octave KE Ss Effects Audition Touch Octave lt gt or lt gt in the lower part of the screen to adjust the pitch of the sound Each time you touch lt gt the pitch is raised one octave Each time you touch lt gt the pitch is lowered one octave The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound 2 to two octaves above the original 2 Press the Exit button to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen MEM When the keyboard has been divided into upper and lower sections the damper pedal is applied to only the upper section If you want to add lingering reverberations to the notes of the lower section see Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 167 33 Chapter 1 Performance Adding Reverberation to the Sound Reverb Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KR Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall 34 1 e Press the Surround Reverb button and watch the its indicator light up A Reverb screen like the one shown below appears Room Reverb Cathedral n OSE Surround Touch L L to switch the screens 2 Touch an icon to select the
177. g measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Hi AOO AUAI 04017912 06 03 3N een SNE BEE BT E
178. g methods Pedal Assigns functions to the pedal and Setting performance pad p 167 Master Tune Sets the KR s standard pitch p 170 External Display Selects the content to be shown on the connected external display p 186 Selects the language used in the Language display p 170 User Image Selects the image data and display Display used p 170 Opening Sets the message that appears when the Message power is turned on p 171 MIDI Setting Refer to p 189 Program Change Refer to p 189 Memory Backup Stores edited settings and other data to the KR p 171 MIDI Ensemble Refer to p 189 Factory Reset Restores the content stored with Memory Backup to the original factory settings p 172 V LINK Refer to p 187 USB Driver Refer to p 196 Remote Control Changing the functions of the remote control s buttons p 172 165 OL423d_y gt Chapter 10 Various Settings Parameter Explanation Allows for calibration of the touch Touch Screen screen p 175 Sets the remote sensor s on or off Ir Serial Port p 174 3 Touch the name of the parameter you want to set Refer to the corresponding page for each function 4 Press the Exit button to return to the Functions screen E Changing the Tuning Tuning O Choosing the Tuning You can play classical styles such as Bar
179. g you want to change Set the value with the dial Touch lt Execute gt Do not remove the external memory while save is in progress 93 v 404dby5 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Adjusting the Tempo This changes the song and Music Style tempos If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed you may find it helpful to first practice with the tempo slowed down Then after becoming more familiar with the song you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes And you can change the tempo even when the song is in progress q D D I a i V Adjusting the Tempo with the Tempo Buttons Pressing the button once increases the tempo by one unit Holding down the button makes the tempo increase continuously Pressing the button once decreases the tempo by one unit Holding down the button makes the tempo decrease continuously You can not adjust the audio Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song files tempo and audio CDs to the basic tempo tempo E Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time Tap Tempo You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad This feature is called Tap Tempo By using the Tap Tempo function you can quickly set the tempo you are thinking of without specifying the tempo in numerical t
180. ge the value Finishing the Settings 4 Press the Exit button The Style Composer screen appears E Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself Style Converter You can take a song you ve composed yourself and extract the portions you need to create your own original Style When you re composing a song there s no need to specify all the chords You can specify some of the chords and the KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the style This function is called the Style Converter Style Converter features an Auto mode that allows you to easily create Styles from songs with a single chord and a Manual mode in which you create Styles from songs with three kinds of chords major minor and seventh chords When creating a song in order to create an music style it s good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style Style Arrangements Music Styles created with the Style Converter function are composed of eight parts Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 Accompaniment 3 Accompaniment 4 Accompaniment 5 Accompaniment 6 A song progresses in predictable a sequence such as intro melody A melody B bridge and ending With the KR such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states We call these six parts of a song Divisions Division Performance div
181. gle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 ra Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell 84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree ER Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets gt 86 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 9 GB Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 g E E GE weet 8 H 207 Drum Set List No sound D 208 EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number JAZZ BRUSH ORCHESTRA SFX Set Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime 2s Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap sw High Q High Q Closed Hi hat 3 EXC1 Slap Slap Pedal Hi hat 2 EXC1 Io Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Open Hi hat 3 EXC1 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 RideCymbal1 2 8 Sticks Sticks Sticks see Square Click Square Click Square Click gt Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell lU Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 2 JazzKick1 e Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Kick 1 Concert BD ss w Side Stick 2 Side Stick 2 Side Stick2 en Jazz Snare 1 Brush Tap Concert SD loo Hand Clap 3 Brush Slap Castanets High Q Standard 2 Snare 2 Brush Swirl Concert SD Slap Low Tom 2 Brush Low Tom 2 Timpani F Scratch Push EXC7 Closed Hi ha
182. grams You can assign the function of the sequential switching of the User Programs to the pedal That way each time you depress the pedal the KR switches to the next User Program Great for use in concerts and similar situations this allows you to prepare and save your User Programs in the sequence they are to be used and then call up User Programs in the appropriate order while you perform simply by depressing the pedal 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt Pedal gt in the lower part of the screen A PEDAL screen like the following appears PEDAL Pedal Shift Load Next gt The Pedal Shift and Load Next settings are stored in each User Program set 134 If you want to use the Load Next function to switch among User Programs saved to external memory make sure to set Load Next in all of the User Program sets to ON Also be sure to set the Pedal Shift value so it is for the same pedal E Selecting the Pedal Used for Switching Settings Pedal Shift 3 Touch lt Pedal Shift gt Display Explanation You can use a function assigned to the OFF pedal The left pedal is dedicated to switching Left Pedal User Programs The function assigned to the left pedal cannot be used The center pedal is dedicated to switching User Programs The function assigned to the center pedal cannot be used Center Pedal Press the Exit button to return to the User P
183. guishes the type of the encoded signal then starts playing In some cases however it doesn t play correctly In such cases press lt Reset gt If playback still doesn t occur correctly set Mode to either A V Sync Type A or A V Sync Type B The lt Reset gt icon is also displayed when you select Aux Input Decode as the category in the song selection screen MEMD If the level is set to 0 only the keyboard performance sound from the device connected to the Aux Input jacks will be heard Chapter 7 User Program Registration You can register the currently selected tones transposition and volume balance and a variety of other settings as favorite performance settings User Program This allows you to call up the registered favorite performance settings whenever you need them Registering the settings you often use is makes it even more convenient for you For more on what can be registered to a User Program refer to Parameters Stored to Internal Memory p 216 Panel Settings D User Program Write Temporary Memory KR User Memory HBBBAG Clees IEEEIEEEN 25 26 27 28 20 0 gagada 36 User Programs 1 User Program Set Save Load Save Load BERDI Pte fol halralishreli7 iafl r9 20 er z2len zehl EEGEN EOE EES EE 7 8 9 10 11 12 Il EE EN lij DEENEN esol Z404dpy gt 129 Chapte
184. h the mode to Manual This makes the setting for the Manual mode After that the steps are the same as for Creating Styles in Auto Mode p 156 When you touch lt Play gt in the lower part of the screen you can listen to the performance of the part selected with lt Options gt Changing an Extracted Part You can extract and change part of a song created with 16 track sequencer 2 3 At the Style Converter screen p 156 touch lt Part gt A screen like the one shown below appears 6 404dby gt Touch the performance Part with settings you want to change Use the dial to specify which 16 track Sequencer performance part you want to extract gt In the Manual mode the type of chords appear at the bottom of 4 the screen Set the Parts for all chords Press the Exit button to return to the Style Converter screen The Style Converter screen appears 157 Oo D Q a ie V Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles Saving a User Style You can save the User Styles you create to external memories and the user memory When saved to the user memory User Styles are not deleted when the power is turned off You can also select Styles saved to the user memory by pressing the Music Style User button You can save up to 99 User Styles in user memory What is the User Memory The user memory is the area within the instrument where User Styles created with the
185. hat no pets or other small animals are located on top of the instrument in particular they should be kept away from the keyboard and its lid Otherwise due to the structural design of this instrument small pets or other animals could end up getting trapped inside it If such a situation is encountered you must immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the outlet You should then consult with the retailer from whom the instrument was purchased or contact the nearest Roland Service Center Handling Floppy Disks Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive e Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area To preserve their integrity please observe the following when handling floppy disks e Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk e Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Recommended temperature range 10 to 50 C 50 to 122 F Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields such as those generated by loudspeakers e Floppy disks have a write protect tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data
186. he Style Orchestrator button and watch the indicator light up MEMD When you press the User The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads Fanetion battons th style 2 Orchestrator button s e Press Performance Pad 1 3 to change the arrangement for the indicator goes uk andthe accompaniment function of the Performance Pads changes For details refer to p 94 and p 167 Va Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up Button Explanation When simple Music Styles are 1 Basic This is the simplest arrangement selected there may be no 2 Advanced This is a more involved arrangement change in the arrangement 3 Full This is the most elavorate arrangement even when you use the Style Orchestrator function 69 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Adding Harmony to the Right Hand Part Melody Intelligence You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing the matching harmony is automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand This function is called Melody Intelligence 5 666605 666565 1 e Press the Melody Intelligence button and watch the indicator light up When you play something on the right hand section of the keyboard harmony is added The following Melody Intelligence screen appears
187. he KR Track button or 16 track sequencer E Basic Operation of the Editing Functions While songs are being loaded the measure number in the upper right of the screen is highlighted text and background are inverted Start editing the song only after the measure number is no longer highlighted Selecting the Editing Function 1 Press the Menu button and watch the indicator light up The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears 2 Touch lt L gt lt L gt to switch the page then touch lt Song Edit gt A Song Edit screen like the following appears Sono Edit HK Fn at Quantize Transpose Ea ra 3 Touch an editing function to select that function For more detailed information refer to the corresponding page for each function Function Explanation Page Undoes editing operations that Bodo have been performed pols Copy Copies measures p 146 Quantize Evens out sounds in recorded p 146 performances Delete Deletes measures p 147 Insert Inserts a blank measure p 147 Transpose Transposes parts individually p 148 Erases data in measures creating Erase blank measures Belge Part Exchanges th nds in part 149 Exchange changes the sounds in parts p Note Edit Allows corrections to be made p 149 note by note gt Allows editing of the Tones PC Edit changes that occur during a song p 150 e PC
188. he Pedal or Buttons Are Pressed Manual Punch In Out You can play back a performance and depress the pedal song stops O Starting Recording from the Measure Specified by Buttons and Pedals at the desired place to start re recording Depressing the pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to If using the Performance Pads or pedals you must first playback change the function of the pedals and Pads Follow the Instead of pressing the pedal you can press a procedures in Assigning Functions to Pedals and performance pad or the Rec button to start and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 167 and assign lt Auto Punch In Out gt to the buttons or pedal cancel recording 1 In the Rec Mode screen p 140 select lt Manual Punch In Out gt This changes the recording mode to Punch In Recording 142 Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs Press the Exit button to return to The Composer Menu screen Begin recording Begin recording using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 110 or Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 136 The previously recorded performance will be played back Press the pedal to which Punch In Out is assigned p 167 a performance pad or the Rec button to begin recording then start your performance Recording stops when you press the pedal
189. he Recorded Performance 8 Press the ma Reset button then press the rg Play Stop button When Auto Start p 180 is The recorded performance is played back set to ON and no action is When you press the m Play Stop button playback stops taken for a certain period of time after you have recorded a performance a confirmation screen asking you if you want Track buttons assignments for recorded performances to delete the song appears in When you record only a keyboard performance the performance will be assigned to the display the track buttons as follows If you touch lt OK gt the song is 106 es Normal performance playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard The performance is recorded to the 1 Whole button Layer performance The performance is recorded to the 1 Whole button Split performance The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the 3 Lower button and the upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the 4 Upper button Layer performance and Split performance The lower part of the keyboard is recorded to the 3 Lower button and the upper part of the keyboard is recorded to the 4 Upper button Drum set or sound effect performance Recorded on the R Rhythm button deleted and the demo begins If you want to return to the previous screen and continue with the recorded performance touch lt Cancel gt Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Perfo
190. he Track button for the track you want to re record The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking The m Play Stop button s indicator flashes and the KR is put in recording standby To cancel recording press the Rec button once more Press the m Play Stop button to begin recording Rerecording the Accompaniment Part of Automatic Accompaniment 6 110 When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance set Sync Start p 65 then specify a chord or press the Start Stop button Press the m Play Stop button to stop recording If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment press the Intro Ending button MEM When you want to record over again after deleting all of the previous recording refer to Erasing Recorded Performances p 111 Va The song tempo is stored within the song you selected If you want to change the tempo of the recorded song refer to Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs p 151 and Changing the Tempo Within the Song p 151 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Erasing Recorded Performances You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance 1 e Hold down the Song button and press the Rec button A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete Song Are you sure KR Sa 2 Touch lt OK gt This deletes the recorded song Wh
191. he passage from the fifth through eighth measures over and over You should place Marker A at the beginning of the fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar 2 Touch lt Repeat gt in the Marker screen OFF ON 47138 M Sonate No 1 7138 M Sonate Dis em When lt Repeat gt is On y 404dby gt e If neither Marker A nor Marker B is set the song is played back from the beginning to the end e Ifyou only place marker A playback repeats The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B from marker A to the When you play the song the marked section of music plays back repeatedly end of the song e Ifyou only place marker Cancelling Repeat Playback B playback repeats from the beginning of the 3 Touch lt Repeat gt in the Marker screen and the icon returns to the song to marker B original color Repeat playback is cancelled 101 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back Transpose By using the Transpose function you can transpose your performance without changing the notes you play For example even if the song is in a difficult key with many sharps or flats you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to read and play You cannot transpose audio You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key files and audio CDs When accompanying a vocalist you can easily
192. he range that is unaffected by the damper pedal Va You can change the piano When you press the One Touch Program Piano button the KR will switch to the f g performance settings by following settings regardless of the current panel settings touching the Piano Designer e Ifthe keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections p 32 the button For more details refer keyboard returns to a single section to Piano Designer Button in the Quick Start e The pedals return to their usual functions p 22 e The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected MEMD e The effect is automatically set to Damper Resonance p 46 When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data lt Lyrics gt appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics em Q gt appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen when headphones are connected You can add three dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones p 39 27 Chapter 1 Performance Performing with a Variety of Tones Tone Buttons em The KR comes with a many built in instrument sounds and effects This lets you For more about the names of enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles Tones take a look at the Tone The built in sounds are called Tones The sounds are organized into six tone List p 202 groups which are assigned to the Tone
193. he setting for Piano Style Arranger active p 72 Accompaniment tempo becomes unstable In certain cases such as when playing Music Styles on external memories the accompaniment may lag when excessive amounts of performance data are used Song doesn t play back correctly The bass range sounds odd or there is a vibrating resonance When listening through speakers Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the KR to resonate Resonation can also occur with fluorescent light tubes glass doors and other objects In particular this problem occurs more easily when the bass component is increased and when the sound is played at higher volumes Use the following measures to suppress such resonance e Place speakers so they are 10 15 cm from walls and other surfaces e Reduce the volume e Move the speakers away from any resonating objects When listening through headphones Here a different cause such as resonance produced by the KR would be suspect Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center Song doesn t play back Does the screen indicate message like OK to delete song p 104 The internal songs cannot be played back while recorded performance data remains in the KR s memory Try playing back the song after deleting the performance data Only the sound ofa particular instrument in a song does not play Is the light for the Track bu
194. hen connecting external memory sold separately you can lock the memory port cover to prevent theft of the connected external memory 1 e Connect the external memory to the external memory port 2 Press the External Memory port cover to close the cover 3 Secure the lock using the anti theft lock screws included with the Take care not to lose the anti instrument theft lock screws Also be sure to use only the included screws to secure the anti theft lock 113 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance E Formatting Media Format The process of preparing external memory or disks so that they can be used with the KR is called initialization formatting In certain cases particularly with floppy disks the media is formatted for a specific type of device If the media format does not match the KR s you will not be able to use that media with the KR 1 e Connect the external memory to the external memory port 2 When an external memory is e Press the Song File button initialized all of the data saved on the external 3 e Touch lt File gt memory is erased If you re formatting a used external A File screen like the one below appears memory for reuse be sure to check first to make sure the Song File Menu external memory doesn t contain any data you don t Information Gi Delete want to lose Save Format Media Copy En When initializing floppy disks check t
195. hile the Start Stop button s indicator is not lit chords play This note is called the Chord Tone and the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the Bass Tone E Stopping Automatic Accompaniment O Stopping with an Added Ending 1 e Press the Intro Ending button An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops O Stopping at the Same Time the Button is Pressed 1 e Press the Start Stop button The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button 66 MEMD You can change the sound of the chord tone and bass tone Take a look at Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Config p 162 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro Countdown If an intro plays before your performance you can have a count in sound played to the end of the intro helping you hear when to start playing When the Intro has finished playing the accompaniment plays Count Sound 1 e Press the Count Marker button and watch the indicator light up The following Count screen appears Count In down Countdown Countdown Sound Track MEMD When set to Count In o set this to Count Down or Count Down a count sound is 2 Touch lt Count Mode gt In Down added before playback of the song begins When you press the One Touch Program Arranger button the performance star
196. hoose to use either one or to switch both of them off At step 3 in Procedure p 165 touch lt Ir Serial Port gt A screen like the one shown below appears Models Featuring CD Drive Ir Serial Port Serial Port Serial Port Touch lt Ir Serial gt 4 Display Explanation Off Neither is used Ir The infrared receriver is used The device connected to the serial port is Serial Port used 174 Models Without Moving Key l Function Touch lt ON OFF gt Display Explanation Off Not used On The infrared receriver is used Setting Playback After the Song is Transferred Infrared Playback This sets the KR to play back a song automatically following transfer of the song from the digital device You can also set this so that songs are not played back automatically after the song is transferred Touch lt Ir Play gt Display Explanation Standby Following transfer of the song the song is ready to play but not played back The song is played back automatically Aut ES after the song is transferred Chapter 10 Various Settings E Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen If you ve been using the touch screen for some time the pointer may be shifted making the KR react incorrectly You should correct this displacement when necessary by performing calibration repositioning At step 3 in
197. ht hand performance along with the left hand playback Playing Back a Song 3 Press the m Play Stop button The song will begin playing back The part you selected in step 2 will not sound Once again press the button you selected in step 2 The button s indicator will light up and the part will be heard once again Even while the song is playing you can press the track buttons to mute or un mute the sound Stopping the Song 4 Press the m Play Stop button The song will stop Va For more on music files refer to Music Files That the KR Can Use p 217 You cannot mute individual parts separately in audio files and audio CDs Va If a single Track button Yy 401dpy gt includes more than one instrument and you want to mute just one of those instruments take a look at Modifying the Settings of Each Part p 137 Va When a single Part is not played it is called Minus One Using Minus One you can mute out a particular instrument and play the part yourself MEMD When playing back SMF files for Roland Piano Digital series instruments and the 3 Lower button and 4 Upper button do not correctly control the lower upper performances please change the Track Assign settings Please refer to Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback Track Assign p 183 em You can adjust the balance between the keyboard an
198. ible with Mac OS 9 E Conventions Used in This Manual This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler more concise instructions e Button names are enclosed in square brackets as in One Touch Program Piano button e For easier readability some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual screens and colors e On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets lt gt as in lt Exit gt e The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called touching e An asterisk ora at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution These should not be ignored e p refers to pages within the manual USING THE UNIT SAFELY eee eee 4 IMPORTANT NOTES won avinttnasiinavrisdndsindise 6 Introduction 0 ccceseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 8 Main Features sni naear 8 How To Use This Manual ee 9 Conventions Used in This Manual 9 Panel Descriptions cccceeeee 14 Performance Pads ue 14 Record Playback ENEE 15 Jack Panel Left Side of Bottom Panel 16 Right Side of Bottom Panel ue 17 Before You Start Playing 18 Opening and Closing the Top KR117 00 18 Opening and Closing the Top KR115 19 Raising the Music Rest 19 Using the Music Holders OKRIID 20 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 20 Opening and Closing the Lid en 20 Connecting the Power Cord 21 Connect the Pedal Cable ee 2
199. ibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 60 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 D Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 62 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 TR 808 High Conga Mute High Conga 1 e o Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 TR 808 Mid Conga Open High Conga 1 64 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 TR 808 Low Conga Low Conga 1 65 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale E Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale 67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo es Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo 69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Ca Maracas Maracas TR 808 Maracas TR 808 Maracas Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 72 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Lal Shor Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 74 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 EA caves Claves TR 808 Claves TR 808 Claves 76 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block 77 Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block EE Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 High Hoo EXC4 79 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Low Hoo EXC4 EE Mute Trianglet EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Trianglet EXC5 81 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Trian
200. ic Style are selected automatically However you can also set it so the tempo and Tone settings don t change when you change Music Styles At Step 3 Procedure p 161 touch lt One Touch Setting gt One Touch Setting Suitable Tempo Suitable Tone Other Setting Display Explanation Suitable The suitable tone for a Music Style is selected Tone automatically Suitable The suitable tempo for a Music Style is Tempo selected automatically Other Other settings Style Orchestrator etc are Setting changed automatically Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off Button colors become brighter when the corresponding settings are switched on All items are set to ON when you turn on the power Parameters switched to OFF do not change even when the performance Style is changed 162 E Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point This sets the point the split point where the keyboard is divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split performances p 32 The setting is at F 3 when the KR is powered up F 3 Split Point A IARU B1 B6 Split Point Settings Range gt The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left hand section of the keyboard At Step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch lt Split Point gt S
201. ied data is layered over the previous recording If the Tones used for the copy source and copy destination are different the copy destination Tone is used Mode Insert If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination the copied portion is inserted without erasing the previous recording The song is lengthened by the number of inserted measures 146 Item Content Copy destination measure number To When End is selected the data is copied to the end of the song Times Number of times the data is to be copied E Correcting Timing Discrepancies Quantize You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance by automatically aligning the music with the timing you specify This is called Quantizing As an example let s say that the timing of some quarter notes in a performance is a little off In this case you can quantize the performance with quarter note timing thus making the timing accurate Example Quarter note resolution Actual note data 2 3 Note data after quantization Example Sixteenth note resolution DEE PEEAEE ESE gaa Note data after quantization II Pi dl i Actual note data 3 At Step 3 of Selecting the Editing Function p 145 select lt Quantize gt A screen like the one shown below appears Quantize 3 KI From UR Resolution 1 16 For All Tr Pt All E
202. ied passage as you listen to a recorded performance gt Immediately after the power is turned on Replace Recording is selected Changing the Recording Method 1 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears A U Sync MovinoKey 140 2 Touch lt Rec Mode gt A Rec Mode screen like the following appears Replace DH Rec Stop 3 Touch lt Rec Mode gt 4 to select the recording mode Display Recording Method Replace Replace Recording Mix Mix Recording Loop Loop Recording Auto Punch Punch in recording of the interval In Out between set markers Punch in recording starting from the point at which the pedal the Manual Performance Pad or the Rec Punch In Out button is pressed For more about Punch In Recording refer to p 142 Tempo You can add tempo changes to a p recorded composition See p 151 4 Press the Exit button Returns to the Composer Menu screen E Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording Replace Recording The recording process where previous material is erased as new material is recorded is called replace recording This setting is in effect when you turn on the power 1 In the Rec Mode screen p 140 select lt Replace gt Press the Exit button to return to The Composer Menu screen The KR is set to the replace recording mode
203. ighted 5 When you press the gt Play Stop button the change in tempo stops You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording mode When you re finished tempo recording go back to the ordinary Replace Recording Take a look at Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode p 140 gt If you want to restore the previous tempo delete the tempo data at the place where the tempo was recorded For an explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings refer to Making Measures Blank Erase p 148 Tempo Recording Shortcut Hold down the Rec button and press one of the Tempo buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording settings Record tempo information In this case tempo recording is canceled when recording ends Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles Creating Original Styles User Styles Although the KR features a variety of internal Music Styles you can also create your own These original Styles are called User Styles You can use either of the two methods described below to create a User Style Style Composer With this method you combine internal Music Styles to create new Styles You can create a new Style by selecting from among the Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 Accompaniment 3 Accompaniment 4 Accompaniment 5 and Accompaniment 6 parts in different styles Style Converter p 155 Create a new Style by extracting the portions y
204. ili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd GUANGZHOU OFFICE 2 F No 30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi Xiang Wu Yang Xin Cheng Guangzhou 510600 CHINA TEL 020 8736 0428 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA Roland Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd 45 1 Block C2 Jalan PJU 1 39 Dataran Prima 47301 Petaling Jaya Selangor MALAYSIA TEL 03 7805 3263 When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE LTD 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei T
205. image be displayed exactly according to the interval setting 6 Press Exit button to go back to the Functions screen Selecting the Part to Which the Effect is Added EffectsPart You may find effects not being applied to certain parts when different effects are applied to the upper tone layer tone and lower tone In such instances you can select which effect is to have priority 1 Press any tone button and select the tone p 28 2 Touch lt Effect gt 3 Touch lt Part gt A screen like the one shown below appears EffectsPart Upper DH 4 Touch t is added The effect will be applied to the selected part and other parts to which the same effect has been applied Available settings Upper Layer 1 Layer 2 Lower 1 Lower 2 179 ITU Chapter 10 Various Settings Formatting the User Memory The KR features an internal storage area where you can save recorded performances and User Styles This space is called the User Memory The following content is stored to the user memory e Content registered to the Favorites p 82 e Sets of saved User Programs p 131 e User Styles saved on user memory p 158 e Image files set with the User Image settings p 170 To delete all of the content held in the user memory and restore the original factory settings carry out the following procedure 1 Press the Song File button 2 Touch lt File gt 3 To
206. images be displayed in the order you prefer by changing the file names By adding a number from 001 through 999 to the six to eight character file name you can have the files be displayed according to their numerical order E Changing Slide Shows 1 Press the One Touch Program Piano button The piano screen will appear 2 Press the Option button 3 Touch the lt External Display gt p 165 The following screen will appear External Display Setting Slide Show 4 Touch the Mode IL t to select a value other than Slide Show 5 Press Exit button to go back to The Functions screen gt You can change the Mode value by pressing DISPLAY on the remote control Chapter 10 Various Settings E Setting the Image Display Duration When running slide shows of multiple image files saved on external memory you can specify the length of time each image is to appear 1 Press the One Touch Program Piano button The piano screen will appear 2 Press the Option button 3 Touch the lt External Display gt 4 Touch the lt Slide Show gt at the bottom left of the screen The following screen will appear Slide Show Setting Little Fast 5 Touch the lt Interval gt o set the interval at which the displayed images are to be switched Available settings Slow Little Slow Medium Little Fast Fast Display of images may not depending on the size of the
207. ime Auto Start ON OFF This setting determines whether or not background music is added when Auto Demo begins BGM ON OFF When Auto Start is set to ON a period of five to ten minutes passes without the instrument being touched the demo automatically starts The demo stops playing if the instrument is operated in any way When Auto Start is set to OFF the demo does not start unless you touch the lt Auto Demo gt icon in the Demo screen 4 Press the Exit button to return to the Quick Tour screen e This setting is saved even after the power is turned off For more information about Quick Tour refer to the Quick Start You cannot start the demo songs if you have any performance recorded but not saved Before starting the demo either delete or save the song when the song delete screen p 104 is displayed Chapter 10 Various Settings Adjusting the Piano Designer Disabling Functions Other Resonance Than Piano Performance Panel Lock The Panel Lock function locks the KR in a state where only More of the resonance effect is applied as the value is piano performance can be used and all buttons will be You can made precise changes to the Piano Designer Resonance setting increased disabled This prevents the settings from being inadvertently 1 Press the Piano Designer button modified even if children press the buttons accidentally 7 In the Panel Lock
208. improvised fashion and you may find notes not conforming to measure lines odd divisions of the parts played in the left and right hand and other such features that do not match what is shown in the notation e Neither the external display nor the television will be able to display properly if both are connected at the same time Lyric Color Selects the color used for lyric in the display Value White Black Red Yellow Green Blue Cyan Magenta Device If you find that the image quality of the television is poor try switching the television format Value VGA PAL NTSC Connecting Video Equipment V LINK Connecting the KR to a V LINK compatible image device allows you to control the images with the KR V LINK AALA LLS is functionality promoted by Roland that allows linked performance of music and visual material By using V LINK compatible video equipment visual effects can be easily liked to and made part of the expressive elements of a performance To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections Connection Examples V LINK compatible image device ES seess HSH I 0000000 0000 E S USB MIDI Interface KR s Jack Panel Front Phones MicVolme Mic Aux input 2 0 ee Hios E Using the V LINK function 1 Press the On
209. ination song number If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new song the previously saved song will be erased If you do not want to lose a saved song select a number with no song name indicated in the save destination column Selecting the Save Setting when saving to external memories 8 e Press the Option button 9 Touch Tone Compatibility E2 Ki to select the tone compatibility format 117 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Some Tones are unique to the KR Data that is recorded using these tones may not play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players When you want to save data so that it can be played back on another devices save the data with MT set as the Tone compatibility format Display Explanation The song is saved as data capable of reproducing KR performances with richness of expression using this unit s special Tones Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players other than this unit MT You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP G R series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices lt Note gt When data saved with MT as the Tone compatibility format is played back on this instrument some of the nuances that were
210. indicator light goes out 54 Chapter 1 Performance E Changing the Metronome Settings O Adjusting the Tempo You can adjust the tempo of the metronome The tempo and beat of the metronome changes automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play back a song 1 e Press the Tempo or buttons to adjust a tempo You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of J 10 500 Pressing the Tempo and buttons simultaneously returns the selected song accompaniment to the basic tempo O Changing the Beat of the Metronome Va Q When ei is selected only the upbeat will sound 1 e On the Metronome screen touch lt Beat gt 2 Select the beat with the dial O Changing the Volume The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels 1 e On the Metronome screen touch lt Volume gt 2 Select the volume with the dial Choosing D sets the volume to the lowest level and choosing Loo sets it to the highest level Choose Dor to silence the metronome sound O Changing the Type of Sound You can change the sound the metronome makes The setting is at Normal metronome sound when the KR is powered up 1 e On the Metronome screen touch lt Sound gt 2 Select the sound with the dial Displayed Explanation Displayed Explanation Normal metronome A Electronic metronome sound sound e i Go Ores j ne PSL 1 2 3 in Japanese tua 1 2 3 in
211. ined even after you take your fingers off the keys The length of the sustain changes subtly according to the extent to which the pedal is depressed On an acoustic piano holding down the damper pedal will allow the remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the sounds that you played from the keyboard adding a rich resonance The KR simulates this damper resonance Va You can change the amount of resonance applied with the damper pedal Please refer to Adjusting the Piano Designer Resonance p 181 Sostenuto pedal center pedal This pedal sustains only the sounds of the keys that were already played when you pressed the pedal Soft pedal left pedal When you hold down this pedal and play the keyboard the sound will have a softer tone Va You can assign functions to the pedal Refer to Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 167 Adjusting the Sound s Volume and Brilliance Turn the Volume knob to adjust the overall volume Turn the Brilliance knob to adjust the brightness of the sound Volume Brilliance Wa fons DH D L C L C p A Min Max Mellow Bright You can use the remote control to change the volume Before You Start Playing Connecting Headphones The KR has two jacks for plugging in headphones This allows two people to listen through headphones simultaneously making it very useful for lessons and perfor
212. ing Styles from external memories to user memory Chapter 10 Various Settings Changing the Settings for One Touch Arranger E Procedure 1 Press the One Touch Program Arranger button to display the Basic screen Os Rock 4 4 M1 Upper Lauer Wood Bass EMA 2 Press the Option button A screen like the one shown below appears Functions One Touch Setting LiL J Parameter g Explanation Name Refer to Adjusting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch Key Touch p 161 Selects the setting to be specified when the One Touch Setting One Touch Program Arranger button is pressed p 162 P Sets the key at which the keyboard is divided Split Pomt the split point p 162 Arranger Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment Config plays sounds p 162 gt You set the tuning and make a variety of other settings for the KR starting with the second page of the settings screen 3 Touch the name of the parameter to be set Refer to the corresponding page for each function 4 Press the Exit button to return to the Basic screen E Adjusting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the keys At Step 3 in Procedure p 161 touch lt Key Touch gt You can play with the most HAN natural touch This is the touch Fines Closest to that of an acoustic piano E E H Light Heavy Medium Heavy F
213. ing appears Copy Stule Media no File ne J User A SO op ate Specifying the Copy Source 5 Touch lt Media gt to select the copy source media 6 Touch lt File gt copy When All is selected all of the Styles in the selected folder on the external memory are copied to user memory 160 Specifying the Copy Destination 7 Touch lt User gt for the Style to select the copy destination If a Style name is displayed a style is already saved to that number If you select a number with a previously saved Style and then copy to that number the previously saved Style is deleted If you do not want to lose the Style being saved select a number in the save destination column that does not yet have a name 8 Touch lt Execute gt The Style on the external memory is copied to user memory Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable E Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to External Memories You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to external memories In this case touch the large arrow icon in the center of the Copy Style screen in Step 4 above so that the arrow points upwards Turn the KR will copy user memory Styles to the external memory The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copy
214. input jacks and touch the button below After that start playback with the recording device Set Aux Input When you touch the lt Set Aux Input for Playback gt the screen to change the setting is displayed Playing back CDs to which this performance data is recorded on CD players other than the KR s internal CD player may result in damage to the speakers To listen to these CDs either play them back on the KR s internal CD player or connect to the KR in accordance with the Change the setting and the connections instructions in Playback Aux Refer to Making Advanced A V Sync Input Settings p 128 Input p 127 9 sa dpy5 Note With certain Surround settings data may not be output from the KR as you intend Turn Surround off when using the A V sync function Alternatively you can switch Surround on and turn on all parts other than the keyboard with the part On Off settings Surround Option Surround Option I Rhythn WS zz reak nt recone AS k ON OFF 125 Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys A V sync E Making Advanced A V Sync Output Settings 1 e Press the Menu button The A V Sync display will appear If the Composer Menu screen appears touch L to switch the page 2 Touch the lt A V Sync Output gt The following display will appear A V Sync Output N b ap Connect the recording ex r device to Ba
215. instruments of the same number g Ed a g ES Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute Room Snare 1 Standard 1 Snare 2A Room Snare 2 Standard 1 Snare 1 POP ROCK JAZZBRUSH HIP HOP VOX DRUM 21 R amp B Snare R amp B Snare R amp B Snare Jungle BD 2 R amp B Snare EA Rock Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Metronome E Click Rock Snare m 1 Rock Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 2 Metronome Pi Rock Snare m 2 24 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 1 Concert SD Pop Snare m 1 E Por Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Snare Roll Pop Snare Ghost 26 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Finger Snap Pop Snare m 1 EA Finger Snap Finger Snap 2 Finger Snap 2 High Q Finger Snap 28 TR 707 Claps TR 707 Claps TR 707 Claps Slap TR 707 Claps 29 Hand Clap EXC7 Hand Clap EXC7 Hand Clap EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Hand Clap EXC7 EJ Hand Clap 2 EXC7 Hand Clap 2 EXC7 Hand Clap 2 EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Hand Clap 2 EXC7 31 Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Sticks Hand Clap E Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Square Click Pop Pedal HH 33 Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Metronome Click Gospel Hand Clap al Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Metronome Bell Vox Dut Pop Kick 2 Rock Kick 2 Jazz Kick 2
216. ion 0 OOH Bank Select Bd Ee Program MSB LSB Change 4 Touch Ly t for the parameter and make the settings Display Description Bank Select MSB Sets the Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Sets the Bank Select LSB Program Sets the Program Change messages Change Program Numbers This prevents the PC number from being Tx PC SC Channel transmitted Off or sets the transmission channel Channel 1 16 5 Press the Exit button The User Program screen returns to the display Touch lt Write gt to save the setting to the User Program For more detailed information refer to Saving Performance Settings User Program p 130 135 4 1 34dpby D Q a H VI Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer Multitrack recording always you to listen to previously recorded material while continuing to add performances of other parts The KR is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen parts Since each part s performance is recorded using one tone you can layer performances using up to sixteen tones for the data in one song The function used to layer these sixteen parts one at a time is called the 16 Track Sequencer 16 Track Sequencer You can record performances for up to 16 parts overlaying them part by part to create a single song Part 1 GE Flute Part Bass Part et a 3 Piano
217. ion Auto Oooo oo Mode Depth 5 e Touch Ki for the parameter being set to select the value Parameter Display Explanation This selects settings that are adjusted for use with Auto headphones when headphones are connected When no headphones are connected settings adjusted for speakers are selected move Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through Speaker speakers are selected Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through Headphone headphones are selected Depth 1 4 Changes the apparent depth of the sound The p effect is applied more as the value is increased Width 1 128 Changes the breadth of the sound You can also change the value with the dial 6 When you press the Exit button you return to the Surround screen 42 Chapter 1 Performance Adding Liveliness to the Sound Dynamic Emphasis You can add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and distinctness 2 Press the Sound Control button to display the Dynamic Emphasis screen The Dynamic Emphasis function is switched on enlivening the sound Dynamic Emphasis Creates a aay with Boosted bass and treble Equalizer Touch the Type icon to select the type Indicator Description Sharp Creates a sound with boosted bass and treble Clear Produces a sound with chords in the low registers that are clear and distinct
218. ions to p m PLAY button Display Explanation One Song Only the selected song is played back Playback stops when the song is finished All Song Songs are played back continuously in sequence starting from the currently selected song Internal Song Songs in the selected genre are played back continuously Favorites Songs Songs registered to the Favorites are played back in sequence Songs on External Memories Floppy Disks and CDs Songs within the selected folder are played back continuously Random The songs are played back in random order Internal Song The songs in all genres are played back in random order Favorites Songs Songs registered to the Favorites are played back in random order Songs on External Memories Floppy Disks and CDs Songs within the selected folder are played back in random order 2 Press the Exit button to return to the Functions screen Changing the TEMPO Button and the TRANSPOSE Button Functions 1 Touch lt TEMPO gt or lt TRANSPOSE gt assign functions to TEMPO and TANSPOSE button Display Explanation Changes the tempo Pressing button Tempo slows the tempo down pressing button speeds up the tempo Scrolls the notation in the external display Notation Press button to return to the previous page press button to advance t
219. is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable em It s a good idea to get into the habit of moving the write protect tab on the floppy disk to the Protect position when vou ve finished saving your data Keeping the tab at Protect prevents operations that could erase your songs by mistake Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Deleting Saved Songs This deletes songs that have been saved on external memories or to Favorites To delete a song on an external memory first connect the external memory to the external memory port Press the Song File button Touch lt File gt The Song File screen appears Touch lt Delete gt A Delete Song screen appears Delete Song ka ono Fie GL Execute LA to select the storage media Touch lt Media gt Touch lt File gt 8 Ea to select the song to be deleted Touch lt Execute gt The selected song is deleted Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the operation is finished Press the Exit button to return to the Song File screen Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable 119 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Copying Songs on External Memories to Favorites You can take songs saved on external memories and copy
220. is a function that provides you with refer to Selecting Music Styles accompaniment in a variety of musical genres just by specifying chords in the left Music Style Buttons p 61 hand Automatic Accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra even when performing alone What Are Music Styles Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called Music Styles There are many different kinds of music around the world and each has its own unique features What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a unique combination of elements like instrumentation melody and phrasing which interact to create the musical character Elements of Music Styles A Music Style consists of a set of six sections called divisions Division Explanation Intro Played at the start of a song Original The basic accompaniment pattern Variation This is a variation on the Original accompaniment pattern This is a one measure phrase inserted at a point where the Fill In To Original W o Orig mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original This is a one measure phrase inserted at a point where the Fill In T Wen a mood changes and the accompaniment moves ahead to the Variation fous variation Ending The conclusion of a song In addition the accompaniment Styles are composed of up to a maximum of eight performance parts Rhythm Bass Accomp
221. ision Intro The intro is played at the start of a song Ending This is played at the end of a song Original This is a basic accompaniment pattern Variation This is a developmental accompaniment pattern It is a variation on an Original Fill In To This is a one measure phrase inserted at a Variation juncture where the mood changes It is used to make a song more lively Fill In To This is a one measure phrase inserted at a Original juncture where the mood changes It is used g to make a song more sedate You can make a song more lively or more restrained by increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions You can also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the Divisions 155 6 404dDy gt Oo D Q a ie V Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles O Creating Styles in Auto Mode Points to note when creating songs e Use one of the major minor or diminished seventh chords to create the song We recommend using diminished seventh chords to compose the song e Itis convenient to record the sounds shown below for the Parts of the 16 track sequencer Rhythm Bass Accomp Accomp Accomp 1 2 3 D 10 2 7 8 9 gt When using parts other than Part 2 7 8 9 and D refer to Changing an Extracted Part p 157 Creating songs 1 Use the 16 track sequencer to record the song Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 1
222. ixed Lioht Display Explanation Notes sound at an unchanging volume level Fixed regardless of how lightly or forcefully you play the keyboard This sets the keyboard to a light touch You can achieve fortissimo ff play with a less Light forceful touch than usual so the keyboard feels lighter This setting makes it easier for children whose hands have less strength This sets the keyboard to the standard touch You can play with the most natural touch Maalam This setting is closest to the response of an acoustic piano This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch You have to play the keyboard more forcefully H than usual in order to play fortissimo ff so eavy the keyboard touch feels heavier This setting allows you to add more expression when playing dynamically Touch any of the icons lt Fixed gt lt Light gt lt Medium gt or lt Heavy gt to set the key touch for the keyboard To make fine adjustments touch the slider in the screen Move the slider to the right to add resistance and to the left to make the key touch lighter gt You can also change the key touch by pressing the Piano Designer button For more details refer to the Quick Start 161 KIT Chapter 10 Various Settings E Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch Setting Normally when you select a Music Style the Tone and tempo settings suitable for that Mus
223. lable choices in that character group A gt B gt C Touching lt A 0 gt selects the type of character Each time you touch lt A 0 gt the character switches between alphabets and numerals 5 e Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch the tone name to select the Tone Press the Exit button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen 30 Chapter 1 Performance Performing with Multiple Sounds Layered Together Layer Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a layer performance For instance it s possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously Grand Piano 1 Touch lt Layer 1 gt on the Basic screen 4 108 Nev Sono 4 4 M 1 Upper The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance plus the tone indicated in the lower part of the display are now played together Here the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the upper tone and the tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the layer tone In the same manner you can touch lt Layer 2 gt to layer further sounds Changing the Tones 2 3 4 Touch the name of the tone to be changed Touch here to highlight the tone name Press a Tone button to select the new tone p 28 When you have selected the tone press the Exit button The dis
224. lanced Out gt Start recording vith the aa recording device v 3 Once recording starts touch Begin Output SS Ki 3 e Press the Option button The following display will appear Se Q a 5 V A U Sync Output Output Mode Level Audition 4 Touch the lt Output Mode gt LA Ki to select output connectors When the sound has been distorted touch the lt Level gt o adjust the volume Parameter Setting Explanation Output Mode Balanced Out AUX Out Output connectors Audio level other than keyboard Level 0 127 performance data You can confirm the settings by touching Audition 126 Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys A V sync Playback Aux Input E Making the Connections When connecting audio recording devices Jack Panel Front Mic Aux Input Audio cable Recording device When connecting video recording devices Jack Panel Front Aux Input Mic Audio cable VIDEO IN pa Television Projector Video Equipment 1 e Press the Menu button The A V Sync display will appear 2 Touch L to switch the page then touch the lt Aux Input gt The following display will appear AZU Sune If both the output for A V Sync and AUX input are connected simultaneously please set
225. le Computer Inc Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation This device in part makes use of Independent JPEG Group software All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Introduction Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KR Intelligent Piano While the KR Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano performances it also features easy to use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous other useful functions In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety Main Features O Roland Digital Grand Brings Refinement to Interior Style The KR s grand piano cabinet exhibits elegance in form with a beautiful black mirror like surface With features just like those found on an acoustic grand such as a top that opens and closes and folding retractable keyboard lid KR117M this instrument is a perfect match for lounge or living room The KR117M lid also features hands free closure for enhanced safety O Lusciously Resounding Richly Expressive Piano Sound The KR reproduces the rich tones of a high quality grand piano from the sounds of the hammers as they strike the strings to the sounds made as the keys are released 128 voice polyphony ensures full responsiveness even with heavy use of the
226. lect this when playing the keyboard performance through the KR s internal Ensemble speaker and the accompaniment sound SE through an amp or speaker connected to the Aux Output jacks Location Limited in Space The sounds played with the keyboard and the accompaniment sounds are played through the KR s speakers and the accompaniment sound with reverb FA an applied is played through the speakers connected to the Aux Output jacks Playing the accompaniment sound with reverb from external speakers the effect of being enveloped by the performance Surround effect Piano Sound Surround When any icon is not chosen No sound is heard through an amp or speaker connected to the Aux Output jacks 4 Press the Exit button Speaker 194 Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices Connecting a Computer E Connect to the MIDI Connectors You can use a USB MIDI interface cable sold separately to connect the KR to your computer If the KR is connected to a computer in which sequencer software such as Roland s Visual MT is installed a song you ve recorded on the KR can be saved on your computer Connection Examples To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections In order to make connections to your computer you must install MIDI driver software on your computer
227. led when the keyboard is played Is the KR in layer play p 31 When the KR is connected to an external sequencer set it to the Local OFF mode p 190 Alternatively the sequencer could be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF Reverberation still audible even with Reverb turned off Since the KR s piano sounds faithfully reproduce the sense of spaciousness and reverberation of an actual acoustic piano s sound a certain amount of reverberation is still perceptible even with the reverb effect deactivated The tuning or pitch of the keyboard or song is off Have you set transpose p 102 Are the settings for the Temperament and Stretch Tuning correct p 166 Is the setting for the Master Tune correct p 170 Sound from the Output jacks is not right Have you made the correct Advanced 3D settings for use with headphones Changing the Advanced 3D Mode to Headphones or Auto and connecting a pair of headphones configures the settings for use with headphones Effects cannot be applied to Tones If different effects have been selected for the upper lower Layer and other Tones and the effects for the Parts don t match only one of the effects is applied It s not possible to apply more than one effect at the same time so when a performance has been recorded on multiple tracks or when playing along with a song as it s played back the desi
228. lit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN MUSIC HOUSE CO LTD FREDDY FOR MUSIC P O Box 922846 Amman 11192 JORDAN TEL 06 5692696 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL YOUSIFI amp SONS CO Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L L C Malatan House No 1 Al Noor Street Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL 2478 3443 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Rawda Abdul Qader Jazairi St Bldg No 21 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY ZUHAL DIS TICARET A S Galip Dede Cad No 37 Beyoglu Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 249 85 10 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On
229. lowing appears Part Balance Drm SFX 127 DD Ep Ep Accomp Switch the screens This shows the volume balance between the keyboard s Tones when either layer performance p 31 or split performance p 32 are used or the volume balance when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects p 29 Displayed Tone Part Drm SFX Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys Upper Upper Tone Lower 1 Lower Tone 1 Lower 2 Lower Tone 2 Layer 1 Layer Tone 1 Layer 2 Layer Tone 2 When you touch lt Accomp gt you return to the screen for setting the accompaniment Style volume balance 74 Chapter 3 Song Playback Playing a Song Now let s try practicing while playing back internal songs commercial music files and songs saved to external memories You can use rewind or fast forward to go to any desired measure and play back from that point You can also play audio files p 80 Record Playback buttons Selecting the Song When playing back songs on optional external memory first connect the external memory to the external memory port 1 e Press the Song button The following Song Selection screen appears J 138 Sonate No 15 4 4 M 1 gt 2 2 Liebestraume 3 3 Etude op 10 5 4 de te veux 5 Valse op 64 1 Classical ER gt l gt N a Favorites File fe Touch and drag
230. ly recorded song before you re record p 111 Movement of notation or keyboard display not smooth There may be times when a complex variety of information is being displayed or when a large amount of data is displayed at one time Change the notation display settings as described below p 89 Set Bouncing Ball to Off Set Color Notation to Off Set Keyboard to Off Set External Display p 187 to Panel The recorded performance has disappeared Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KR is turned off or a song is selected A performance cannot be restored once it s been deleted Be sure to save it on an external memory or User Memory before you turn off the power p 116 Song becomes unstable In certain cases such as when playing songs on external memories the song may lag when excessive amounts of performance data are used Unable to play back internal songs Have you pressed the remote control s MUTE button muting the sound Unable to play back audio files The KR can play back audio files in the following format e WAV extension e 16bit linear e Sampling rate of 44 1 kHz e Stereo A screen asking if want to OK to delete Song suddenly appears Is the Auto Start gt set to On p 180 If no action is taken for a certain period of time while A
231. mba 76 Vibe Tr 77 Marimba Tr 78 Kalimba 79 Music Box 2 80 Music Bell 81 Music Bell 2 82 Tubular bell 83 Church Bell 84 Ballad Bells 85 Bell Monitor 86 Timeline 87 Vibra Bells Organ ChurchOrgan1 Gospel Spin Rock Organ2 German Acco Blues Harp Full Stops Perc Organ2 CO N ol aj A O N Surf s Up o R amp B Organ o Rocker Spin Combo Jz Org N Ballad Organ wo L Organ gt Jazz Organ1 a Masked Opera o Grand Pipe N Theater Org La Seine o ParisRomance N Ki Mellow Bars N Organ 1 N N Organ 2 N wo Lower Organ N A Trem Organ N oa 70s E Organ N o 60s Organ N Nl Jazz Organ2 N Jazz Organ3 N o Jazz Organ4 i Ki Chorus Organ wo ch Perc Organ Hi N Rock Organ1 ao wo Rotary Organ ao A Rotary Org S wo a Rotary Org F no o ChurchOrgan2 KI NX Pipe Organ wo Trem Flute Ki o Organ Flute oy Ki Nason flt 8 gt ch Organ Bass A N Pipe Org Bs
232. mba 50 Kids 6 PnoBndBoogie 3 S S 51 Kids Dance 7 Medium Swing 7 S 52 Cinema 2Beat 8 Jive 9 Slow Swing 0 Quick Step 1 StringsSwing 2 Foxtrot 3 Swing Fox 4 Fox Band 5 Gipsy Swing 6 Fast Swing 7 JzGuitrSwing 8 Jazz Waltz 9 Blue Boogie 20 BigBandBalad 21 30s BigBand 22 Big Band 2 23 Jazz Ballad 24 LooseBigBand 211 s 2 pu ddy KA o 4 K E o a a lt D 212 symbol Indicates the constituent note of chords x symbol Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the x p 59 C CH D Eb E F Cmaj7 C maj7 Dmaj7 Eb maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7 MEAN TEATAN TA eee ee OU C 7 D7 Eb7 M BRGGRUDSGHKGMGEUU Cm C m Dm Ebm Em Fm MAREEN PETH CREE EEEE ATE AE Cm7 C m7 Dm7 Eb m7 Em7 Fm7 EAN CORTES EA ATN E A Cdim C dim Ddim Eb dim Edim Fdim EEEE PETUERE ETRE RETE EP Et Cm7 b5 C m7 b5 Dm7 b5 Eb m7 b5 Em7 b5 Fm7 b5 ELEELE EEEL LELE ETN AEEA ET Caug C aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug TEN EE EE EAE A CPT Csus4 C sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4 Fsus4 AEEA ETET EE EEA ETE AN C7sus4 C 7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 TIEN CARPE AN ELETE EEE OP CH6 D6 Eb6 E6 I m me Wm E mt TT Wm C m6 Eb m6 mm E rm em ot PELE Chord List symbol Indicates the constituent note of chords ke symbol Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the x p 59 F maj7 Gm
233. mbers and Any By selecting a song containing any of this data then displaying it in the KR s notation you can display information about the selected data 4 Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch the song name to select the song Press the Exit button to return to the Song Selection screen O Searching by Song Name 3 Touch lt By Name gt Touch lt By Key gt to return to the Condition Search screen 4 Decide which character you will use for the search The selected character appears in the middle of the screen Enter the character you are searching for For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A B 3 C Touch lt A 0 gt to toggle between alphabets and numerals 5 e Touch lt Search gt The search results appear in the display Touch the song name to select the song Press the Exit button several times to return to the previous screen 81 Chapter 3 Song Playback Registering the Songs You Like Favorites You can register songs you are currently practicing or enjoy playing to Favorites allowing you to select these songs easily Ka You can also register songs on Selecting the Song external memory to the 1 e Press the Song button Favorites For details refer to The Song Selection screen appears p 75 Copying Songs on External Memories to Favorites
234. memory Take a look at Saving a User Style p 158 The following data is saved to the User Style If a song includes data other than this the results you get might not be what was intended e Keyboard performance data e Amount of Reverb effect applied e Amount of Chorus effect applied O Creating a Style in Manual Mode When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode you can clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each individual chord Points to Note when Creating Songs Record your performance with the three chord types of diminished seventh major and minor e JItis convenient to record the sounds shown below for the Parts of the 16 track sequencer Chords Rhythm Bass SE SH mp GE mp Major D 10 3 4 5 6 Seventh 2 7 8 9 Minor 12 13 14 15 gt The chords all share the same Rhythm Part gt If you want to use the performance of other part check out Changing an Extracted Part p 157 Creating Songs Use the 16 track sequencer to record the song Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 136 and other related sections When using music data first select a song p 75 Displaying the Style Converter screen 2 3 4 O Press the Menu button Touch lt Style Converter gt The Style Converter screen appears Touch lt Conv Mode gt then use the dial to switc
235. memory and CDs to the KR s Favorites The KR117M and KR115M includes a Moving Keys function that plays the keys along with the song providing exquisite performances that are played automatically Also included is a convenient remote control which you can use for selecting songs adjusting volume balances switching the Moving Keys function on and off and even for switching the images that appear in external displays simply and easily You can connect an external display or television set to the piano for enlarged displays of the Song Select screen lyrics screen slide shows and notations Introduction O Easy To Use Music Assistant Automatic Accompaniment Feature You can select from an amazing 500 settings to get automatic accompaniment that perfectly matches the song you are playing Each song s Music Assistant settings are shown in a manner that is easy to grasp so playing along with the changes in the accompaniment is a snap For easy enjoyment of Music Assistant the KR also includes songs that you can perform while reading the chord charts O Utilizes External Memory the New Media You can save song data created on the KR to External memory sold separately Extremely portable high capacity external memory also connects easily to computers allowing song data to be transferred easily Taking further advantage of the high capacity memory you can also play back audio files with the KR O Connect External
236. ming piano pieces for four hands Additionally this allows you to play without bothering others around you even at night Plug the headphones into the Phones jack located at the bottom left of the piano Connecting headphones will automatically mute the sound from the internal speakers The headphone volume is adjusted by the Volume knob of the KR Use Stereo headphones Some Notes on Using Headphones To prevent damage to the cord handle the headphones only by the headset or the plug e Connecting the headphones when the volume of connected equipment is turned up may result in damage to the headphones Lower the volume on the KR before plugging in the headphones e Listening at excessively high volume levels will not only damage the headphones but may also cause hearing loss Use the headphones at a moderate volume level Connecting a Microphone You can connect a microphone into the Mic jack and enjoy karaoke with the KR Mic Volume Mic Phones A O A KH 1 Connect a microphone sold separately to the Mic jack on the lower left area of the instrument 2 Rotate the Mic Volume knob in front of the Mic jack to adjust the volume level for the microphone 3 Adjust the mic echo p 48 Some Notes on Using a Microphone Be careful of high volume levels when using mikes late at night or early in the morning e When connecting a microphone to the KR be sure to l
237. n then that the song is to be erased If select CD as the genre you do not mind erasing the data touch lt OK gt If you do 3 Press the gt button to start playback of the CD s songs not want to erase the data touch lt Cancel gt and either The songs on the CD are played save the song data to the Favorites or to external When the KR is set to play back all songs p 75 once the song currently being played back is finished the next song starts playing automatically After all of the memory p 116 songs on the CD have been played playback automatically resumes from the beginning of the CD When the KR is set to play back a single song p 75 playback stops automatically when the song is finished 4 Press the gt m button once more to stop playback of the songs When Selecting Songs in Folders 1 Touch the folder name 2 Touch lt Ci ray gt at the bottom left of the screen After a moment a list of songs in the folder is displayed You can also select the folder using the dial or the a Bwd or gt gt Fwd button on the remote the folder can then be opened by pressing the gt m PLAY button 3 Touch a song from the list that appears to select the song you want to lay back ae Depending on the number of songs contained in a folder this may take some time If a folder contains 500 or more files and or folders some of the files and folders may not be displa
238. n or use lt gt lt gt on the screen to find the note to be corrected g 4ajdpy gt When you ve found the note you want to correct touch Note or Velo for the note Use the dial to correct the pitch or velocity If you want to delete the note touch lt Delete gt When you re done making all the settings press the Exit button 149 D Q H H VI Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs E Modifying the Tone Changes in Changing the Beat in the Middle a Song PC Edit of a Song Beat Map In some songs the instrument sound changes during the i You can create songs that have beat changes during the course of the song that is the Tone changes in the middle of j course of the song a Part In such songs an instruction to switch the Tone is e n gor Ei f H ous inserted at the place where you want the sound to change You can t change a song s beat once it s been recorded Before This instruction is called a Program Change PC and recording the performance determine the beat to be used actions such as deleting program changes or changing the 1 Press the Menu button selected Tone by them are called PC editing The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen It is not possible to insert a program change into a measure or appears beat that does not contain a program change 2 Touch lt Beat Map gt At Step 3 of Selecting the Editi
239. n recorded the OK to delete to the current song song prompt appears in the screen For more detailed Cancel NewSong Add On information refer to If the Following Screen Appears p 104 4 Touch lt New Song gt This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song The KR is put in recording standby To cancel recording press the Rec button once more 5 e Decide on the tempo and beat If necessary press the Metronome button to play the metronome When you have finished making the settings press the Exit button to display the Basic screen 105 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Start Recording 6 Press the rm Play Stop button Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when A two bar count in plays then recording starts the power to the KR is turned Even without pressing the m Play Stop button recording starts when you off If you do not want a play the keyboard There is no count in played when you start by playing rather than performance deleted then save it to an external memory pushing the m Play Stop button or to Favorites Refer to When recording starts the m Play Stop and Rec buttons indicators light up Saving Songs p 116 Stop Recording 7 e Press the rg Play Stop button Recording stops The performance is recorded to the 1 Whole button Listening to t
240. ncer set it to Local OFF Refer to Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard Local Control p 190 Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module Sound Module THRU our IN KR s Jack Panel Front vo Phones Mic Volum Auxinput ow Ze mg 0 0 66 Go WG lt xs ar Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Settings MI DI Ins tru ments You can make MIDI settings like those described below MIDI Ensemble lt MIDI Setting gt You can connect an electronic percussion device or other MIDI Setting MIDI instrument to the KR s MIDI In connector for ensemble playing Making the MIDI settings for the instrument connected to the MIDI In connector is easy The sounds from 1 ON the connected MIDI instrument are played from the KR s speaker DI D D 1 Press the One Touch Program Piano button Tx Channel Site einige 2 Press the Option button 3 Touch lt MIDI Ensemble gt A screen like the following appears Display Explanation Chooses the MIDI send channel SC TEST EI p 190 Normal Switches Local Control on or off Local Control Pad Connect drum pads p 190 Keyboard Connect keyboards lt Program Change gt Program Change 4 Select the method for using the MIDI In connector 0 00H O OOH 1 00H Displayed Meaning al el al el Normal setting Ba
241. nd Option The effect is applied to all parts played on the keyboard The effect is applied to layered part 4 Touch lt All Parts gt or lt Layer Part gt Display Explanation All Parts The effect is applied to all tones played with the keyboard the left hand tone right hand tone and layer tone The effect is applied only to the layer part Layer Part When not using a layer performance p 31 the Surround effect is not applied to the keyboard performance even if lt Keyboard gt on the Surround Screen is set to On When you press the Exit button you return to the Surround Screen E Changing the Amount of Surround Effect e 1 e Press the Surround Reverb button and watch the indicator light up This setting is enabled only when the lt Surround gt type 2 Touch lt Surround gt to display the Surround screen icon is selected 3 On the Surround Screen press the Option button Touch L L to display the following screen Surround Option eieiei 4 Touch the Int and Ext sliders to adjust the volume levels of the external speaker and the KR s speaker When you press the Exit button you return to the Surround screen 38 Chapter 1 Performance Using the Internal Speakers to Add Three Dimensional Spatiality to the Accompaniment Sounds Advanced 3D You can add three dimensional breadth to the sounds you play with automatic accompanimen
242. ndby 6 Press the gt m Play Stop button A two bar count in sounds then recording starts 7 Press the m Play Stop button Recording stops When one part is recorded continue by selecting and recording another part Continue layering parts to finish recording the song e If necessary choose a recording method For more on how to record refer to the following paragraph If you record for the first time there s no need to select the recording method Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KR is turned off It is a good idea to save song data to an external memory or user memory For more information refer to Saving Songs p 116 Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs O Prepare for New Song Recording Selecting the Song to Record 1 Hold down the Song button and press the Bech button The following screen is displayed if there is any previously recorded performance or any song with changed settings OK to delete Song Are you sure Touch lt OK gt to delete the song Determining the Song s Beat and Tempo 2 Press the Metronome button to select the beat p 54 e You can t change a song s beat once it s been recorded If you want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through the song take a look at Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song Beat Map p 150 3 Press the Tempo and buttons to set the basic temp
243. nected to your audio system to enjoy more powerful sound p 191 13 Balanced Out Fixed jacks This provides balanced audio signal output Connect a mixer or other such device here p 122 14 Video Out jack Connect a television here This allows you to display the Song Select screen slide show lyrics and notations on the connected television set p 185 This cannot be used simultaneously with the Ext Display connector 15 Ext Display connector Connect a external display here You can display the Song Select screen slide show lyrics and notations on the external display p 185 This cannot be used simultaneously with the Video Out jack Panel Descriptions Right Side of Bottom Panel Bottom Panel Front Right CD Drive Instrument with Moving a Key 0 21 Floppy disk drive connector Connects an optional floppy disk drive to play and save songs 16 18 19 S Use floppy disk drive available from Roland Attach the floppy disk drive to left of CD drive For details of the attachment refer to the owner s manual of the floppy disk drive 16 Access Indicator This indicator will light when the inserted CD is being read 17 Disc tray Place the CD to be loaded on this tray 18 Emergency eject hole This hole allows the disc tray to be opened in case of an emergency 19 Eject button Press this button to eject the CD You cannot eject the CD unless the power is on 20 Serial connector Conn
244. ng information on the screen At Step 3 in Procedure p 165 touch lt Language gt A screen like the one shown below appears English Touch t to select the language Available settings English Japanese German French Spanish German Spanish and French are displayed for some functions Other screens will be displayed in English 170 E Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays User Image Display You can have image data from computers and other devices shown on the onboard display or on an external display you ve connected You can store two types of image data KR display data and Ext display data gt KR display use images appear on the KR s display when the instrument s power is turned on When you select Automatic or Lyrics as the image type to be shown with the external display as described in Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display and the Television External Display p 186 the images are shown in the external display At Step 3 in Procedure p 165 touch lt User Image Display gt A screen like the one shown below appears User Image Display Select the screen for displaying the User images File Erase Preview Selecting the Display to be Set 1 Touch lt KR Display gt or lt Ext Display gt Select the setting either for KR display or Ext display images
245. ng Function p 145 select The following screen is displayed if there is any lt PC Edit gt previously recorded performance or any song with h d settings A screen like the one shown below appears MANGES SEME OK to delete Song Are you sure Cancel OK Touch lt OK gt to change the song s settings Touch lt Cancel gt to discard the changes you re made iseation Tone Name A screen like the one shown below appears The PC location display uses Measure Beat Tick as the 47138 M Nev Song M 1 format A tick is a unit of time that s shorter than a beat el PU 1 2 4 Touch L L to select the part with the program KI CH change to be edited The Part number appears at the top of the screen ET Use the aa Bwd button and the gt gt Fwd button or eta use lt gt lt gt on the screen to find the program change to P be edited If you ve recorded a song or changed a song s settings When you ve found the Program Change you want to see p 137 a message asking you to confirm the modify touch Tone Name on the screen deletion appears Press a Tone button to select a Tone group then select a Tone with the dial When selecting Part 10 or 11 select the drum set or effect sound 3 Use lt lt lt gt lt PP gt in the screen or the lt lt Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons to move to the measure whose beat you want to change
246. nge Pedal Setting The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a played note is called the bender effect You can assign the bender function to a pedal then apply the bender effect by depressing and releasing the pedal You can also make a setting that determines how much the pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender The maximum range of change in pitch is called the bend range At Step 3 Procedure p 165 touch lt Pedal Setting gt Touch L L to switch the screens Pedal Setting Touch lt Bend Range gt t to adjust the bend range setting You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 in half tone steps up to one octave OoLaidou3 169 Chapter 10 Various Settings E Changing Standard Pitch Master Tune Standard pitch generally refers to the pitch that is heard when you play middle A When performing in an ensemble with other instruments adjust the standard pitch so that the instruments of the ensemble match Tuning all the instruments to a standard pitch is called master tuning At Step 3 in Procedure p 165 touch lt Master Tune gt A screen like the one shown below appears Master Tune 440 Hz 442 Hz Touch t l to change the pitch Standard pitch can be set to any value from 415 3 466 2 Hz E Changing the Language Language Five choices are available for the language used in displayi
247. ning It is suitable for piano solos This setting is selected when the power is turned on When set to OFF the standard tuning curve is used It is suitable when playing in an ensemble with other instruments Chapter 10 Various Settings E Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions You can assign a variety of functions to the left and center pedals the expression pedals and the performance pads You can call up the assigned functions just by pressing the corresponding pedal or pad EI Use only the specified expression pedal EV 7 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit O Assigning Functions to Pedals At Step 3 Procedure p 165 touch lt Pedal Setting gt Pedal Setting Expression Pedal Lasel Left Pedal MESIE lu Touch t to assign functions to each of the pedals gt Pressing the One Touch Program Piano button restores the piano performance functions to the pedals p 22 O Assigning Functions to Performance Pads 1 Press the User Function button and watch the indicator light up A screen like the one shown below appears User Pad Setting Fill In elel Pad 2 2 Touch t to assign functions to each of the Performance Pads gt If you set the pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting User Programs the function assigned to the pedal can
248. nk Select Bank Select Program Normal Make changes in Tone and other settings oe a Change from the connected device Select this when you have percussion pads connected to the KR s MIDI In connector You do not need to make any MIDI settings Display Explanation Pad on the KR Select pad Tones and make other Bank Sends Bank Select MSB messages settings from the connected pads for further ank Select MSB p 191 details refer to the Owner s Manual provided with the pads Bank Select LSB Sends Bank Select LSB messages p 191 Select this when you have a keyboard connected to the KR s MIDI In connector Program Change Sends Program Change messages Keyboard You can select tones for the connected Program Numbers p 191 keyboard from the KR No MIDI settings need be made on the KR 5 When Keyboard is selected in Step 4 above use t to select the Tone The connected keyboard plays using the selected Tone 189 Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices Making the Settings 1 Press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Press the Option button 3 Touch lt MIDI Setting gt or lt Program Change gt 4 Touch ti to make the setting for each item Press the Exit button to return to the Functions screen E Selecting the Transmit Channel Tx Channel MIDI organizes things into channels which are numbered from 1 through 16
249. not be used Refer to Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs p 134 O Functions that Can be Assigned Pedals Performance Pads Function Explanation Toggles the Leading Bass function on or off The function stays on as long as the Leading pedal to which this is assigned is pressed Bass When assigned to a Performance Pad this is alternately switched on and off each time the pad is pressed Only the Rhythm part is played After No Chord is switched on specifying a chord No Chord by playing the actual keys cancels the function and all of the accompaniment parts are played During the performance of Automatic Break Accompaniment the accompaniment stops for one measure only Fill In to Performs the same function as the Fill In Variation To Variation button p 68 Fill In to Performs the same function as the Fill In Original To Original button p 68 Fill In A fill in is inserted but the accompaniment pattern after that doesn t change Half Fill In to This plays a fill in half a measure long See then switches to the Variation Variation accompaniment pattern Half Fill In to This plays a fill in half a measure long Original then switches to the Original accompaniment pattern Original This changes the accompaniment pattern Variation without inserting a fill in When this function is used during Arranger Automatic Accompaniment the Reset accompaniment re
250. ns Stopping the Song 5 76 Press the m Play Stop button once again The button indicator light goes out and the song stops When the song is finished playback stops automatically Press the ta Reset button to return to the beginning of the song Record Playback Buttons Record Playback Bass Menu Rhythm Whole Accomp Lower Upper 5 85066 LTT Track buttons Rhythm Whole Bass Accomp Lower Upper Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button Use these buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played For more detailed information refer to p 97 a Dese button Returns to the beginning of the song gt Play Stop button Plays back the song or if the song is currently being played it stops the song Rec button Records the performance For more detailed information refer to p 104 lt lt Bwd button Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time the button is pressed Moves back the playback position of the song one second each when an audio file is being played back When held down the song rewinds continuously gt gt Fwd button Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the button is pressed Advances the playback position of the song one second each when an audio file is being played back When held down the song is forwarded continuously Holding down the
251. nsformer Type Harmonist Type Transformer Harmonist Music Files Part MIDI Settings for Bank Select LSB Bank Select MSB Program Change MIDI Transmit Channel Equalizer On Off Each Sliders Level Master Level Dynamic Emphasis On Off Type Parameters Stored in Memory Backup Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off Memory Backup p 171 Tuning Tuning Key Stretch Tunings Master Tune Effect the part to which the effect is added Metronome Sound Count In Measures Sound Countdown Sound Language Track Assign System Reverb On Off Type Depth Parameters Advanced 3D On Off On Off for Each Part Various Settings Remote Control s Setting External Display Device Infrared Transmission Function AUX Input settings MIDI Setting Tx Channel Parameters Stored in the User Program Set Pedal Shift Load Next 216 A V Sync Output Output Mode Parameters That are Stored After the Power is Turned Off Touch Screen Opening Message Start On Off Auto Demo BGM On Off USB Driver Equalizer User Settings Jazz Organ Footage User Settings Piano Designer User Settings Music Files That the KR Can Use What Are Music Files Music Files contain information describing the details of a musical performanc
252. nt from this connector to the external MIDI connector MIDI In Connector Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable sold separately This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external MIDI devices The KR receiving MIDI messages can output sounds exchange tones and perform other operations EI External MIDI devices can t be used for remotely changing the Tones played by the KR s keyboard 188 E Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device you re about to connect 2 Switch off the power to the KR and the device you re about to connect 3 Use a MIDI cable sold separately to connect the MIDI connectors to each other Please refer to the connection examples below 4 Switch on the power to the KR and the connected device 5 Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected device 6 You should also set the MIDI settings as needed For details on the MIDI related settings refer to p 189 p 191 Connection Examples Setup with a MIDI Sequencer Roland MT Series S i t Ge KR s Jack Panel Front MID Phones MicVolume Mic Auxinput out Use Spe 0020 06 Ao When the KR is connected to a MIDI seque
253. nto male voices 3 Sing through the microphone Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected Cancelling the Effect 4 Once again touch the icon you selected in Step 2 The Voice Transformer effect is eliminated Press the Exit button to return to the Vocal Effects screen O Adding Harmonies Harmonist You can sing with a harmony accompaniment even when you re playing solo This is called the Harmonist function 1 e Touch lt Harmonist gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 47 Touch al L to switch the screen Harmonist Harmonist Wlubkd 5th Up 3rd Up 4th Down Variety Lake 49 Chapter 1 Performance 2 Touch any one of the icons Here s what the different icons do Display Explanation Unison Sounds like two people singing the same melody Oct Up Adds another voice one octave higher than the original Oct Down Adds another voice one octave lower than the original 5th Up Adds harmony a fifth above the original 3rd Up Adds harmony a third above the original 4th Down Adds harmony a major fourth below the original The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony My Voice The harmony is added to your voice regardless of the pitch Duo 1 The added harmony matches the chords specified on the Duo 2 keyboard Adding harmony to a single voice gives the effect of uo two people singing toge
254. o Installing Batteries in the Remote Control p 20 E How to Use the Remote Control When using the remote control aim the remote control at the infrared receiver 84 keeping in mind the range of operation below Remote Control Precautions Concerning Use of the Remote Control CD Drive Range of operation Distance 4 m approximately 13 feet Angle MEMO 40 degrees to the left and right of the receiver 000 00 oo 000 Do oo 000 00 00 i Information from the remote is not received when Remote Sensor setting is switched off Refer to Switching ON OFF of the Remote Control p 172 The remote control is able to transmit only one operation at a time The remote control may not operate even within the range of operation if there is an obstacle between it and the main unit Using the remote control near other equipment that uses remote control systems may result in operational errors The life of the battery depends on the amount and conditions of use If the operational range of the remote control decreases change the batteries If you will not be using the remote control for a long period of time remove the batteries The remote s response may suffer if the remote s sensor is situated under spotlights or exposed to other such strong lighting Chapter 3 Song Playback E About the Remote Control Infrared Emitter Restoring the Original
255. o 2 Soft E Piano Selects the chord Chord Tone Hard E Piano Tone When set to Slow Strings OFF no tone is Strings played Choir Doos Voice This selects the way chords are played Chord Manual ae the od Recognition Intelligence 1 Intelligence fanet say g 1 Mode Intelligence 2 NEA VOU SEE UTO Manual play all of the notes describing the chord What is Chord Intelligence Chord Intelligence p 59 is the name of the function that recognizes the chords being specified for an accompaniment when only one or two keys of the chords have been pressed which can be used while automatic accompaniment is active How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode e Intelligence 1 Major Ex C Play the chord root Seventh Ex C7 Play the root and HAH the second key below it Major Seventh Ex C maj 7 Play the root and the first key below it Minor Ex Cm Play the root and HM the third key above it Minor Seventh Ex C m7 Play the root HMM the third key above it and the second key below it Diminished Ex C dim Play the root and the sixth key above it e Intelligence 2 Major Ex C HAMM Play the root of the chord Seventh Ex C7 Play the root of the chord HA and the white key to the left of the root Minor Ex Cm Play the root of the chord HAH and the black key to the left of the root Minor Seventh Ex C m7 OL4aidpy gt Play the root of the
256. o CowBell Standard 1 Snare 2B Tape Rewind Phono Noise Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2A Elec Snare 4A High Bongo Mute Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Bongo CowBell Bongo CowBell Elec Snare 4B saoipueddy Drum Set List No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number STD CHINA STANDARD 1 STANDARD 2 STANDARD 3 ROOM Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap High Q High Q High Q High Q High Q Slap Slap Slap Slap Slap Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Standard 1 Kick 1 Standard 1 Kick 1 Standard 2 Kick 2 Standard 3 Kick 2 Room Kick 2 Standard 1 Kick 2 Standard 1 Kick 2 Standard 2 Kick 1 Standard 3 Kick 1 Room Kick 1 Side Stick 1 Side Stick 1 Side Stick 2 Side Stick 2 Side Stick 2 Standard 1 Snare 1 Standard 1 Snare 1 Standard 2
257. o make sure that the disk s write protect tab is slid to the write position p 7 4 Touch lt Format Media gt The following screen appears Format Media SEW External Memory KJ EJ Execute Press the Exit button to go back to the previous screen 114 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Do not remove the storage 5 e Touch lt Media gt o select the storage media to be initialized media until the initialization is 6 Touch lt Execute gt completed A confirmation screen appears If you want to quit the initialization touch lt Cancel gt NOTE 7 Do not eject the floppy disk e Touch lt OK gt while data is being read from Initialization of the external memory begins or written to the disk This When initialization is completed you re returned to the previous screen may Scratch ine disks magnetic surface rendering the memory unusable The disk drive s indicator lights brightly while data is being read from or written to the disk At all other times the indicator is lit more dimly or is not lit at all If Error appears on screen take a look at Error Messages p 201 115 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Saving Songs A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power or choose another song Storing recorded performances and other data to external memories or the Favorites is called saving
258. o of the song If you do not need the metronome sound press the Metronome button once more e When using song data that has already been recorded the recording is made using the source song s basic tempo To change the basic tempo of a song please refer to Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs p 151 139 8 40 dpy gt D Q a H VI Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode You can use any of the four methods below to record with the KR Although you will normally be using Replace Recording where previously recorded material is erased when new sounds are recorded you ll find that you can record songs easily by using this method in combination with other recording methods Replace Recording p 140 This is the normal method for recording New material is recorded as previously recorded material is erased Mix Recording p 141 New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record melodies over prerecorded accompaniment Loop Recording p 141 Specified measures are recorded repeatedly while new notes are combined with existing music A convenient feature for creating rhythm parts Loop Recording allows you to record over and over within a selected segment adding a different percussion sound with each pass Punch in Recording p 142 You can re record only a specif
259. o the next page Transposes the song Pressing button Tran bose lowers the pitch in semitone steps p pressing button raises the pitch in semitone steps Fast forwards and rewinds the song When button is pressed the song rewinds Ee when button is pressed the song is fast forwarded CD Volume Only with models Changing the volume of the Song on CDs featuring CD Drive CD sync Only with Synchronizing the piano and models accompaniment featuring CD P Drive 2 Press the Exit button to return to the Functions screen The remote control buttons original function assignments are restored when the power is turned off If you want to save the changed settings carry out the memory backup p 171 173 OoLaidou3 Chapter 10 Various Settings E Changing the Infrared Transmission Function Settings Some digital devices equipped with an IrDA infrared port are able to transfer song data in SMF format to the KR For more detailed information refer to the owner s manual for the digital device Note Users are responsible for learning how to use infrared transmissions The KR is not necessarily compatible with all devices equipped with an IrDA port Roland cannot answer questions regarding infrared transmissions Selecting functions Infrared Transmissions or Serial Port You cannot simultaneously use the remote sensor and infrared receive with the KR You can c
260. occur due to the nature of a liquid crystal display and do not indicate a malfunction They can be minimized by adjusting the brightness of the screen p 25 The touch screen doesn t respond correctly The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced if some time has passed since it was last used Take a look at Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen p 175 to correct the positioning Depressing a pedal has no effect or the pedal effect doesn t stop Is the pedal connected correctly Make sure the pedal cord extending from the stand is securely connected to the pedal connector on the rear of the unit p 21 Images not shown on external display when external display is connected Is the external display properly connected p 185 Is the external display s power turned on Are you using a display that is compatible with the KR Refer to Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument p 185 Do you have a television and external display connected at the same time Connect only one of these Are the KR s settings correct Follow the instructions in Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays User Image Display p 170 to set the External Display image Also refer to Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display and the Television External Display p 186 Has a different function
261. of headphones can be connected here p 23 2 Mic Volume knob Adjusts the volume level for the microphone p 23 3 Mic jack Used for connecting microphones p 23 4 Aux Input jacks You can connect other sound generating devices or audio equipment here and have their sound be played through the KR s speakers p 193 This is also used for transmitting and receiving performance data included in player piano data p 127 5 MIDI Out In connectors Connect to external MIDI devices to exchange performance data p 188 6 USB connector You can connect a computer and exchange performance data between the instrument and the computer p 178 p 195 7 Expression Pedal jack You can connect an expression pedal optional EV 7 to use this as an expression pedal 8 AC inlet Connect the included power cord to this inlet p 21 16 Aux Output MIDI Out In Gi Ge Expression Pedal JEAN Gs Ge Kg Balanced Out i O O Video Out Ext Display L Mono O O ey oo HOT Main Output 10 dBu i 12 13 14 15 9 Pedal connector Connect the pedal cord here p 21 10 Input jacks You can connect other sound generating devices or audio equipment here and have their sound be played through the KR s speakers p 191 11 Aux Output jacks You can connect amps and external speakers here and play accompaniment or surround sound p 194 12 Main Output jacks These jacks can be con
262. ol to switch screens For more information refer to 3 Turn off the connected display Using the Remote Control p 84 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KR 2 Turn off the KR Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument In general a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan monitors that are available on the market are compatible with this instrument However before you connect any monitor make sure it meets the following specifications e Resolution 640 x 480 pixels e Horizontal scan frequency 31 5 kHz e Vertical scan frequency 60 Hz e Connector 3 row 15 pin D Sub type e Signal Analog Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the frequencies mentioned above Using a display that is not compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output when images move and in certain cases may even damage the display E Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections D sub 15 pin D sub 15 pin Mini Mini Ext Display KR s Jack Panel Display Cable S Ext Display Connector Sold separately a External Display 1 Turn off the power to the KR and the display to be connected 24 Before You Start Playing About the Touch Screen The KR makes use of a touch screen This lets you carry out a wide variety o
263. olkValzer 1 6 Detroit Pop 31 Dixieland 6 FolkValzer 2 7 60s Rock n 32 Hawaiian 7 Polka Yanks 8 DreamSloRock 33 Hula 8 Polka Party 9 CountryRock1 9 Madison 0 CntryBallad1 0 Musical il Groovin R amp B Gospel Latin 1 Pub Boogie 2 Oldies 1 E 2 Vienna Waltz 2 Clock Rock n 1 SimplyChaCha 2 Kids Shuffle 4 CountryPop 1 2 Latin Pop 1 4 Movie March D SwinginCntry 3 Orch Bossa 5 Music Hall 6 Soul 4 AmazinGospel 6 Orch Bolero 7 Rock n Slow 5 SimpleCumbia 7 Orch Waltz 8 Oldies 2 6 Medium Gipsy 8 Holiday 1 9 CntryBallad2 7 ModrnBeguine 9 Classic 20 CountrySwing 8 Fast Gipsy 20 Jing Ju 21 Rock n Fever 9 Rhumba 21 MarchingBand 22 Country Beat 0 GospelShuffl 22 March 23 1 Slow Country al ContPraise 1 23 Slow Waltz 24 CountryRock2 2 ContPraise 2 24 Fast Waltz 25 CountryFox 1 3 Gospel 25 Paris 26 Blues 4 Samba 26 Quiet Waltz 27 R amp B 5 ModernChaCha 27 Holiday 2 28 Slow Dance 6 Salsa 28 Holiday 3 29 Twist 7 Soft Gospel 29 2 Beat 30 60s Beach 8 Gospel Shout 30 Lager Polka 31 Slow Oldies 9 AcoustRhumba 31 Slow Polka 32 Early Rock 20 Acoust Samba 32 AustrianPolk 33 Go Go Rock 21 Trad Rhumba 33 AustrianWalz 34 Mersey Beat 22 Gospel Pop 34 Irish 35 CountryPop 2 23 GospelBallad 35 Tejano 36 Cajun 24 Latin Dance 36 Celtic 37 Country 25 Cha Cha 37 Musette 38 Cntry Dreams 26 Trad Tango 38 Scotland 39 Charleston 27 Sunshine
264. on Specific dree ge 111 Changing How Recording Gtops 111 Recording Songs Starting with Pickups 112 Using External Memories s sesssssssssrstsstesstestesse 113 Connecting and Ejecting an External Memor En 113 Formatting Media Format 114 SAVING SONES ornest een E e EE ER ae E EE 116 Deleting Saved Songs ss sssseeisssssrstssssrsrtsrtessterteess 119 Copying Songs on External Memories to Favorite Siei enn a a EE lalasesaatseoativassie 120 Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to External Memories 121 Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys AIN SYNC sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 122 RECOPCING oi pentier eebe Eed 122 Making the Connections cccscccseeseeteteeees 122 Making Advanced A V Sync Output SEET EE 126 Playback Aux Input ses ssssesssssssrssssssesresntessresteess 127 Making the Connections cccccceseeseeteteeees 127 Contents Making Advanced A V Sync Input KEE 128 Chapter 7 User Program Registration ccscccsecseeesees 129 Saving Performance Settings User Program jo deeg cteteeiebtvtes 130 Calling Up Saved User Programs en 131 Changing the Way User Programs Are Called UP isea ekeen aaeei raho unane nica ascgsteeaseas 131 Saving the User Program Deise 131 Loading Saved User Program Sets 000 132 Deleting Saved User Program Sets ccecee 133 Copying Sets of User Programs on External Memories to the User Memor 133
265. on has completely evaporated Do not allow rubber vinyl or similar materials to remain on the unit for long periods of time Such objects can discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Do not paste stickers decals or the like to this instrument Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior finish Maintenance Since your piano has a polished finish that is as delicate as that found on finely crafted wooden furniture it needs careful periodic care A few important suggestions concerning the proper care of the unit follow e For dusting using a soft clean cloth and or piano use feather duster Be sure to wipe gently Even the tiniest grains of sand or grit can leave scratches on the surface if too much force is applied while wiping Do not use any cleaners or detergents since they might deteri orate the surface of the cabinet and produce cracks e Ifthe cabinet s surface loses its luster wipe it thoroughly with a soft cloth dampened with a little of the polishing liquid Do not use any cleaners or detergents since they might deteri orate the surface of the cabinet and produce cracks Do not use dusting cloths that contain chemicals Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation The pedal
266. onto the disk Rear side of the disk Write can write new data onto disk UI e The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive it may be difficult to remove the disk Protect prevents writing to disk Write Protect Tab e Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them and to protect them from dust dirt and other hazards By using a dirty or dust ridden disk you risk damaging the disk as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction Disks containing performance data for this unit should always be locked have their write protect tab slid to the Protect position before you insert them into the drive on some other unit except the PR 300 or a product in the HP G HPi MT KR or Atelier families or into a computer s drive Otherwise if the write protect tab remains in the Write position when you perform any disk operations using the other device s disk drive such as checking the contents of the disk or loading data you risk rendering the disk unreadable by this unit s disk drive Before Using External Memory Using External Memory Never touch the terminals of the External memory Also avoid getting the terminals dirty External memories are constructed using precision components handle the cards carefully paying particular note to the following e To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity b
267. oque using historic temperaments tuning methods Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal temperament the most common tuning in use today But at one time there were a wide variety of other tuning systems in existence By playing in the temperament that was in use when a composition was created you can experience the sonorities of chords originally intended for that song At Step 3 in Procedure p 165 touch lt Tuning gt Tuning H I ji Key C Equal pren pa Stretch Ei ees on OFF You can choose from among the eight tunings described below Tuning ZE Characteristics system This temperament divides the octave into 12 equal parts All intervals will be Equal slightly out of tune by the same amount This setting is in effect when you turn on the power This temperament makes the 5th and 3rd intervals pure It is unsuited to Just Maj playing melodies and cannot be transposed but is capable of beautiful sonorities Just intonation differs between major Just min and minor keys The same results as major can be obtained in a minor key 166 Tuning Characteristics system This tuning is suitable for the music of Arabic Arabia This temperament is a modification of meantone temperament and just intonation allowing more freedom of modulation Performances are possible in all keys M Kirnberger This temperament is based on the theorie
268. or light up The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played Press the Fill In To Original button and watch the indicator light up The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one bar fill in at the appropriate place and time Adding a Fill in without Changing the Accompaniment Pattern You can play only the fill in without changing the accompaniment pattern Press the lit To Original or To Variation Fill In button during the performance 68 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the Screen You can change accompaniment patterns in intros fill ins endings and so on by touching the screen This lets you enjoy even more advanced performances 1 e Press the One Touch Arranger button The Arranger basic screen is displayed 2 Touch lt Arranger gt The following screen appears 4 4 M 1 Ending Va gi Orio inal N ae For more information about S d 2 leading bass refer to p 168 GA b Break Leading Bass ale ith a Touch the screen to change the accompaniment pattern E Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles Style Orchestrator You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment This function is called Style Orchestrator Each Music Style has three different accompaniment arrangements 1 e Press t
269. ording been selected p 110 Has the setting for Punch in Recording p 142 or Tempo Recording p 151 been made Select the replace recording method p 140 It is not possible to record while the notation is being generated Once the unit has finished generating the notation i e when the measure number in the screen is no longer highlighted try the operation once again You cannot overdub with audio files and audio CDs Notation is not indicated properly in the display If you select a part that does not contain performance data notes will not be displayed in the notation Change the part that is displayed p 89 The notation screen feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult complex musical works that demand accurate notation Refer to Notes Regarding the Notation Display p 87 In the notation screen some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen and not be displayed Tempo of recorded song or metronome is off If you select an internal song in which the tempo changes during the song and then record the tempo will change in the same way for the performances that are recorded on the other tracks The tempo of the metronome will also change in the same way If you record additional material without erasing the previously recorded song the song will be recorded at the first recorded tempo Please erase the previous
270. ory in the Song Select screen even when you press the Option 3 Touch the slider for the respective parameter to change ay utton the setting Display Setting Explanation 3 Touch the lt CD Data gt to select the type of With some player piano CDs the cR piano and accompaniment sounds may not be synchronized Display Explanation Syne 07100 EE om Auto The CD type is detected automatically sounds so that they are in time General CDs for Player Piano contain audio with the accompaniment Type A and MIDI data and the data format may vary from one CD to the next If the CD s Level 0 127 Adjusts the CD volume level i format does not match the KR s settings a beep will sound Certain general 4 Press Exit button to go back to The Composer Menu Type B Automatic Piano CDs may not be playable on the KR screen A Commercial Audio CD CDs other than a Off those designed for use with the piano player v piano d E Note that certain commercially available CDs cannot be played back on the KR 4 Press Exit button to go back to The previous screen 177 Chapter 10 Various Settings Showing a Series of Images on an External Display Slide Show You can use the KR to display your favorite images stored on external memory using a connected external display or television set Making the Connection Guitar D 665605 5 565066 E T te
271. ou need from songs composed with the 16 track sequencer When you re composing a song there s no need to specify all the chords You can specify just some of the chords and the KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the Style Style Converter features an Auto mode that allows you to easily create Styles from songs with a single chord and a Manual mode in which you create Styles from songs with three kinds of chords major minor and seventh chords E Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles Style Composer You can create a new style by selecting from among the Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 Accompaniment 3 Accompaniment 4 Accompaniment 5 and Accompaniment 6 parts in different Styles This function is called the Style Composer You can only combine the KR s built in Styles Displaying the Style Composer Screen 1 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears A U Sync Play Mode Lyrics Track Assign co Rec Mode MovinaKeu 2 Touch 4 lt gt to display the following screen 6 404dby gt Composer Menu Se AMajjAm 1 LP pmr cra 16tr Song Edit Chord Sequencer Sequencer Stule Beat Map Composer Converter Rec Mode MovinoKey 153 Oo D Q E a ie V Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles 3 Touch lt Style Composer gt Ifa User Style has already been
272. ou re working on has tempo changes press the ta Reset button to go back to the beginning of the song before you carry out this operation Changing the Tempo Within the Song You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition The KR stores song tempo information and performance data separately Therefore when making changes to the tempo in a song you must record the changes in the tempo information independently of the performance data This recording of the tempo is called Tempo Recording E Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo changes Setting the Rec Mode to Tempo 1 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears 2 Touch lt Rec Mode gt A screen like the one shown below appears Tempo DH Rec Stop 3 Touch the lt Rec Mode gt This makes the setting for tempo recording Press the Exit button a number of times to switch to the screen where the measure number is indicated in the upper right of the screen When the KR goes into Tempo Recording the tempo indication is highlighted Recording the Tempo 4 Use the da Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons to move slightly before the measure where you want to change the tempo 5 Press the Rec button and watch the indicator is flashing The KR is put in recording standby 151 8 4a dpy gt Chapter
273. ower the volume If the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in noise may be produced by the speakers e Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by Changing the orientation of the microphone Relocating microphone at a greater distance from speakers Lowering volume levels 23 HA e v Q x gt Q NO aioieg Before You Start Playing D ER gt gt oO t Con necting an Exte rnal 2 Use display cable sold separately to connect the D e H 7 Di splay display to the Ext Display connector on the KR 3 Turn on the KR You can connect a computer monitor or other such external display to the instrument and display notations and lyrics 4 Turn on the connected display on the larger screen and display whatever images as you like MEMO For more about the external display settings refer to For more on handling the external display refer to your display s Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the owners manual External Display and the Television External Display p 186 For more on displaying images refer to Selecting Turnin g the Power Off Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays User Image Display p 170 After use turn off the power using the following procedure Va If your instrument came with a remote control you can use the remote contr
274. pedals What s more The Piano Designer feature allows you to create your own favorite piano tones O True Grand Piano Feel The KR features Roland s Progressive Hammer Action keyboard which reproduces the feel of a grand piano with a firm weighty touch in the lower registers and a lighter response in the upper registers This keyboard also faithfully reproduces the distinctive click that s produced when a grand piano s keys are played Escapement function In addition to the ability of adjusting the key weight a Hammer Response function which reproduces the subtle action of the hammers is also incorporated so there are two key touch controls that come into play when determining the precise character of the keyboard Additionally the instrument s pedals are firm and responsive lending your performances fuller and more detailed expressiveness O Accomplish Tasks Easily with the Main Buttons Almost all of the KR s common functions including playing back songs displaying notations running the automatic accompaniment selecting tones and so on can be accomplished using the Main buttons to the left of the screen O Full Complement of Player Piano Functions You can also use the CD drive to play back a wide variety of music on the CD included with the instrument as well as songs on CD ROMs containing saved SMF files player piano CDs and audio CDs Moreover you can add song data by copying songs saved on USB
275. pen Long top stick Short top stick The topsticks and topslip work together as illustrated below The long top stick for inner top slip C The short top stick for outer top slip D CAUTION If you use the wrong top slip the top stick could slip out of the top slip causing the top to fall Make sure that the end of the top stick is inserted securely into the top slip To close the top reverse the opening procedure Before You Start Playing Opening and Closing the Top KR115 Raising the Music Rest 1 Gently raise the music rest then secure it in place 2 To collapse the stand fold in the metal fittings while supporting the stand with both hands and gently fold down the stand A CAUTION Always be sure to put the music rest in the upright position before opening and raising the piano top Be sure to leave the music rest in the upright position before closing the piano top Open the Top board ZA WARNING Children must not be permitted to open or close the top on their own adult supervision is required 3 Lift the right front the upper note side A in the figure of the board with both hands fold it up 4 While holding up the top with one hand lift up the top stick and insert its end into the appropriate top slip Z WARNING When opening the top be careful not to open it too far Opening the top at an angle in excess of 20 degrees may damage the unit or cause the top to
276. play Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument In general a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan monitors that are available on the market are compatible with this instrument However before you connect any monitor make sure it meets the following specifications Resolution 640 x 480 pixels Horizontal scan frequency 31 5 kHz Vertical scan frequency 60 Hz Connector 3 row 15 pin D Sub type Signal Analog EI Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the frequencies mentioned above Using a display that is not compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output when images move and in certain cases may even damage the display 185 Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections D sub 15 pin D sub 15 pin Mini Mini Ext Display Display Cable Sold separately KR s Jack Panel Ext Display Connector EE EH External Display 1 Turn off the power to the KR and the display to be connected 2 Use display cable sold separately to connect the display to the Ext Display connector on the KR You cannot display information or images with an external display when a television is connected to the Video Out jack To use an extern
277. play returns to the Basic screen Cancelling the Layer 5 Touch lt Layer 1 gt Touch lt Layer 2 gt to have lt Layer 2 gt play as well The lt Layer 1 gt and lt Layer 2 gt icons are dimmed and the Layer performance is cancelled Now when you play the keys only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded Va When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data lt Lyrics gt appears in the Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics MEMD Q gt appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen when headphones are connected You can add three dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones p 39 Va When you touch Octave lt gt lt gt on the tone selection screen the pitch of the keyboard s sound is changed in octave units To learn more see Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift p 33 MEMD You can change the balance of the Upper and Layer Tone volume For instructions see Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance p 73 31 Chapter 1 Performance Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands Split Dividing the keyboard into right hand and left hand areas then playing different sounds in each section is called split performance The boundary key is called the split point The split point key is included in the left hand keyboard ar
278. plit_Point Ol p C3 F 5 C4 F 4 Touch either lt C3 gt lt F 3 gt lt C4 gt or lt F 4 gt in the lower part of the screen The key you chose becomes the split point To set another key as the split point touch KJ Li i the screen then specify the key You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6 E Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Config This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are played and how the keys are pressed to specify chords What are the Chord Tone and Bass Tone When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped and Sync Start p 65 is turned off chords are produced when you play in the left hand side of the keyboard This is called the chord tone and the root of the chord that is played at the same time is called the bass tone Chapter 10 Various Settings At Step 3 Procedure p 161 touch lt Arranger Config gt Arranger Configuration Accomp D Bass Tone Chord Tone LoL J of each item to make settings Parameter Value Explanation Name Accomp All Music Style parts are played Accomp Only Music Style rhythm parts chord Kee Tones and bass Tones are played OFF Acoustic Bs A Bass Cymbl ii ie a Selects the bass Tone Bass Tone When set to OFF no Fretless Bs toneis played Slap Bass1 a Organ Bass Synth Bass 101 Thum Voice OFF E Piano 1 E Pian
279. po and tone change to selections that go well with the selected Music Style If you do not want to change the tempo and tone refer to Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch Setting p 162 d n For instructions on selecting Music Styles refer to Selecting Music Styles Music Style Buttons p 61 de For instructions on starting and stopping the accompaniment refer to Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment p 65 MEMD You can change the range in which chords are played Please refer to Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point p 162 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment E About Chords A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously Chords are indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord the root and the chord type which is determined by the other notes of the chord For example the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note C and the chord type m minor C m is made up of the three notes C E and G C m is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen Cm Chord Type Boot Note C G Root Note o O All chord roots are indicated as a letter sometimes with or b added and correspond to the notes shown below MEM Normally settings used for the Chord Intelligence function are E Playing Chords with Simple Fingering ead eee
280. position When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears at the cursor position For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C gt A Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through nu English upper case English lower case numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position When you have finished inputting the characters touch lt Execute gt Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable gt If you touch lt All Clear gt at the bottom of the screen and then touch lt Execute gt the display reverts to the screen that normally appears when you turn on the power to the instrument E Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off Memory Backup Normally the various settings revert to their default values when the power is turned off However you can specify that the settings will be remembered even when the power is turned off This function is called Memory Backup gt For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup refer to Parameters Stored in Memory Backup p
281. pply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation IMPORTANT NOTES e To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night e When you need to transport the unit pack it in shock absorbent material Transporting the unit without doing so can cause it to become scratched or damaged and could lead to malfunction e Do not apply undue force to the music rest while it is in use e Use only the specified expression pedal EV 7 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit e Use a cable from Roland to make the connection If using some other make of connection cable please note the following precau tions e Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For information on cable specifications contact the manufacturer of the cable e Before opening or closing the keyboard lid always make sure t
282. r 7 User Program Registration Saving Performance Settings User Program Any collection of settings including those describing the current status of your data selections or settings Automatic Accompaniment can be saved to the User Program button You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the User Program button Saving your preferred combinations of Music Styles and Tones as well as other frequently used settings makes it more convenient You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KR gt For more on what can be registered to a User Program refer to Parameters Stored in the User Program p 216 1 Set the Music Style Tone and other data until the settings are the way you want them 2 Press the User Program button A User Program screen like the one shown below appears RRE 2 StraightRock e N D Q a 5 lt V 3 Rock n Fever 4 Modern Jazz 5 Symphony E Write File Pedal 3 Touch lt Write gt A Write User Program screen like the following appears Write User Program USER SET Rename 1 Doollap Group fe Execute 130 Giving a name to a set of User Programs 4 Touch lt Rename gt A Rename screen like the following appears Rename z x fins USER SET oS V E e DEF GH uKL mp POR STU UI Yz When you touch the cursor mo
283. r Program button Stores the selected functions and states of the buttons p 130 Performance Pads 11 Style Orchestrator button This is used to change the arrangement type for automatic accompaniment with the Performance Pads p 69 14 ced Full CC 13 Visual Piano zo Oo e To Variation To Original ing Pie ed ed Fill In M S MoO Qore 15 16 17 21 22 The KR117 is the model that was used for producing all of the panel depictions that appear within this Owner s Manual 12 User Function button This is used to assign a variety of functions to the Performance Pads p 167 13 1 3 buttons The operation of each is changed depending on the buttons numbered 11 12 14 Music Style buttons Selects a Music Style for automatic accompaniment p 61 Pressing the User button selects a User Style that vou ve made yourself or a Music Style on external memory p 63 15 Fill In buttons Inserts a fill in in an automatic accompaniment and changes the accompaniment pattern p 68 To Variation button To Original button 16 Intro Ending button Play an intro or ending during automatic accompaniment p 65 17 Start Stop button Starts and stops automatic accompaniment p 65 18 Count Marker button You can change the count settings p 67 p 96 These allow you to add and move markers in the notation as well as repeat playback of song segments simply and easil
284. rataria Trinidad Wl TEL 868 638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro C A Av las industrias edf Guitar import 7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas Venezuela TEL 212 244 1122 AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Austrian Office Eduard Bodem Gasse 8 A 6020 Innsbruck AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM FRANCE HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 CZECH REP K AUDIO Kardasovska 626 CZ 198 00 Praha 9 CZECH REP TEL 2 666 10529 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL
285. red effect may not be applied In the upper range the sound changes abruptly beyond a certain key On an acoustic piano notes in the upper one and a half octaves of the keyboard continue to sound until they decay naturally regardless of the damper pedal There is a difference in the timbre as well Roland pianos faithfully simulate such characteristics of the acoustic piano The range that is unaffected by the damper pedal will change depending on the Key Transpose setting Anote doesn t stop playing Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been changed p 162 Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may be sounded continuously 198 Case Cause Remedy Troubleshooting Case Cause Remedy A High pitched whine is produced When listening through headphones Some of the more flamboyant and effervescent piano tones feature an ample high end component which may make the sound appear to have metallic reverberation added Since this reverberation becomes particularly audible when supplemented by heavy reverb you may be able to diminish the problem by reducing the amount of reverb applied to the sound When listening through speakers Here a different cause such as resonance produced by the KR would be suspect Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center Chord Intelligence can t be used Has Chord Intelligence been set to manual p 162 Is t
286. rench Horn2 45 Santur 43 OrchestraBrs 46 Yang Qin 44 Brass 1 47 Yang Qin 2 45 Brass 2 48 Er Hu 46 BrassSection 49 Soft Pad 47 PowerBrass 50 Soft Pad 2 48 Pop Orch 51 Syn Strings1 49 Contemp Orch 52 Syn Strings2 50 Brass sfz 53 Syn Slow Str 51 Brass Fall 54 OB Strings 52 Trumpet Fall 55 JP Saw Str 53 EX Alto Sax 56 Timpani 54 AltoSax Tp 57 Warm JP Str 55 Alto Sax 58 OrchestraHit 56 Grow Sax 59 Good Old Hit 57 BreathyTenor 60 Euro Hit 58 Tenor Sax 61 6th Hit 59 Tenor Sax 2 62 Bass Hit 60 Tenor Sax f 63 Philly Hit 61 Tenor Sax B 64 Philly Hit 2 62 Baritone Sax 65 Mix Hit 1 63 English Horn 66 Mix Hit 2 64 Bassoon 65 Piccolo Sax Brass SE 67 Recorder 1 BlowAltoVib 63 Pome Blow 2 Mariachi Tp 69 Shakuhachi 3 Romantic Tp s SECH 4 PowerBrass 2 gt 5 Flute 72 Bagpipe 6 ChamberWinds EE Le DIE 8 Sax Section yar pe en SE 10 Mar Tp amp Shake 11 Flute Clari EE 12 Multi Winds TO Saw rasal 13 Brass Sect 2 BO Saw Brass2 14 EX Tp amp Shake 81 Synth Brass1 15 Super Tenor 82 Synth Brass2 16 AltoSax Soft 83 DetuneSawBrs 17 Soprano Sax SS Ero Brass 18 Clarinet 85 SynBrass sfz 19 Oboe 20 EX Trumpet Voice 21 Flugel Horn 22 Pan Flute 1 Aerial Choir 23 Qu Di 2 Jazz Scat 24 SuperF Horns 3 Gregorian 25 Angel Pipes 4 Dreaming Box 26 Trumpet 5 Glass Pad 27 Tp Shake 6 Rich Choir
287. ressing this button toggles the Surround effect and the Advanced 3D effect on and off INTERNAL This switches the genres of the internal songs 3 FAVORITES Selects songs in the Favorites When you press the button with external memory or a disk connected or CD the EXTERNAL ege connected storage media is selected 4 MUTE This mutes all of the sounds 5 FUNC1 FUNC2 You can use the function assigned to this button You can also change the function assigned to the button p 172 The settings for the TONE button HARMONY button and TRANSFORM 6 CANCEL button are restored to their original values The left and right tracks switch to a piano tone Pressing the button successively changes tone of the Lower track Upper track and 7 TONE User track Each press of the button takes you to the next selection among the available choices which are in order panel notations notations keyboard lyrics slide show 8 DISPLAY You can press the DISPLAY button while the Tempo screen or Volume screen is displayed to clear the Tempo screen or Volume screen Some songs may not feature screens with lyrics Pressing the aa button at the beginning of the song selects the previous song lt lt Pressing the aa button at a point other than the beginning of the song returns you to the beginning of the song 9 This starts and stops playback of the song gt a Playback alternately starts and stops each time you press the gt m button You can
288. rmance Recording With Accompaniment Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment Settings for Recording Performances 1 e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment 2 Decide on the Music Style When you have finished choosing the settings press the Exit button to display the Basic screen Recording Settings 3 Press the Rec button You press the Rec button and the following messages will appear when a song has already been recorded Va If you select lt New Song gt Do you want to record when a song has already been a new song or add on recorded the OK to delete to the current song song prompt appears in the screen For more detailed Cancel NewSong Add On information refer to If the Following Screen Appears p 104 4 Touch lt New Song gt This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song The KR is put in recording standby To cancel recording press the Rec button once more 5 e Decide on the tempo Start Recording 6 Play a chord on the lower part of the keyboard You can change how recording is stopped when recording a An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts and recording starts at the same time i f performance with Automatic Stop Recording Accompaniment To learn how see Changing How 7 e Press the Intro Ending button Re
289. rmation You can view file names and other information concerning songs 1 Press the Song File button 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Information gt A song information is displayed E Hiding the Lyrics Lyrics Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke as well as some of the internal songs include lyrics data When you play such music files the lyrics automatically appear in the screen If you do not want lyrics to appear automatically set this to OFF 1 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears 2 Touch L L to switch the screens then touch lt Lyrics gt A screen like the one shown below appears 3 Touch Ly Ki to select the setting Display Explanation Lyrics are displayed automatically when ON performance data containing lyrics is played back OFF Lyrics are not displayed even if the song data being played back contains lyrics data 4 Press the Exit button to return to The Composer Menu screen gt Even when this is set to OFF you can still have the lyrics be displayed by touching lt Luries gt when it appears in the Piano or Basic screen p 26 Chapter 10 Various Settings gt The screen may be switched when you press the button while the Lyrics screen is displayed To have the lyrics displayed again touch lt Lyrics gt on the Piano or Basic screen or
290. rogram screen E Sequential Loading of User Program Sets Stored Load Next When using the pedal to switch your User Programs you can also call up sequential sets of User Programs as saved to external memory This feature is called the Load Next function 3 Touch lt Load Next gt t Li to select the setting Display Explanation Switches Load Next off The next press of the pedal after the 36th User Program is called up returns you to the first User Program of the same User Program set OFF Switches Load Next on The next press of the pedal after the 36th User Program has been called up takes you to the first User Program in the next User Program set ON Press the Exit button to return to the User Program screen Chapter 7 User Program Registration Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting PC Numbers You can have PC Program Change numbers be transmitted to an external MIDI device when you switch the User Program on the KR You can register PC number settings to each of the User Programs just as you can with button settings and other settings preferences Calling Up the Performance Settings to Be Set 1 Press the User Program button then touch the name of the performance setting you want to set Setting the Transmission of the PC 2 Press the Option button 3 Touch lt Lal Jet to switch the page to display the following screen UPG Opt
291. rograms on the external memory are copied to user memory Specifying the Copy Destination 7 Touch lt User gt destination for the set of User Programs If a User Program name is displayed already a User Program saved to that number is already If you select a number with User Programs data and then copy data to that number the previously saved User Programs are deleted If you do not want to delete the saved User Programs select a number in the save destination column for which no name is displayed 133 N Se Q a 5 lt V Chapter 7 User Program Registration 8 Touch lt Execute gt The set of User Programs on the external memory is saved to user memory Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable E Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to External Memories You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and copy them to external memories In this case in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4 above touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the arrow to point up This sets the KR to copy the User Program set in the user memory to the external memory The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying sets of User Program set from external memories to user memory Using the Pedal to Switch User Pro
292. rs and other devices To turn the power on turn the Volume knob all the way down and then press the Power switch The power will turn on After a few seconds you will be able to play the keyboard to produce sound Use the Volume knob to adjust the volume This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally 1 Connect the supplied power cord to the AC inlet jack 2 Connect the pedal cord to the Pedal jack 3 Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord 5 Cramp and screw at A see the picture above 4 Cramp the power cord and pedal cord with Cord d t B C and D the pict Cramp and screw ere i seethe picture To turn the power off turn the Volume knob all the above way to the left and press the Power switch 5 Plug the power cord into an AC outlet The power will be turned off Ifyou need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet Refer to Power Supply p 6 21 22 0 gt A S 5 o ER wn Before You Start Playing About the Pedals The pedals have the following functions and are used mainly for piano performance y tor p Soft Pedal Damper Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Damper pedal right pedal While this pedal is pressed notes will be susta
293. rted before the measure Ins de where the cursor is positioned The measure in which the cursor is SS positioned is deleted Allows input of chords without playing the keyboard Refer to Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard p 144 Chords All Clear Deletes all of the data that s been input Clear Deletes the data at the cursor position Records the input chord progression Touch this icon when you have finished inputting all of the chords Execute 3 Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select a Music Style p 61 143 D Q a H VI Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs 4 Press the Exit button You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen 5 Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment pattern Refer to Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer 6 When you have finished inputting all the data touch lt Execute gt When storage of the data is complete return to The Composer Menu screen Now press the gt Play Stop button and try playing the melody along with the accompaniment you created Songs you ve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the power If you do not want to delete the song save it to an external memory or to user memory Refer to Saving Songs p 116 Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer Move the cursor Change the accompaniment arrangements Musl
294. s a stereo spectrum Rotary speakers often used with the electric organs of the t Enhancer Adds sparkle and tightness to the sound Ge S SE SE is type provides modified response for the rota isolator Addsa special effect to the sound by cutting the Rotary2 ry speaker with the low end boosted further volume in varying ranges EE SST i Rotary Multi It comprises vibrato chorus overdrive and rotary Low Boost oosts the volume of the lower range creating affoste powerful lows High Pass Filter This is a low cut filter It cuts the low frequency component Stereo Delay1 This is a stereo delay The delay time is set to a length of one eighth note Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by Stereo Delay2 This is a stereo delay The delay time is set to a length of one quarter note triplet Stereo Delay3 This is a stereo delay The delay time is set to a length of one dotted eighth note Stereo Delay4 This is a stereo delay The delay time is set to a length of one quarter note Stereo Delay5 This is a stereo delay The delay time is set to a length of one half note Monaural Delay This is a monaural delay Modulation Delay Adds modulation to the delayed sound Triple Tap Delay Produces three delay sounds center left and right Overdrive vacuum tube amplifiers Distortion Produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive O
295. s as you play Oe ee DigiScore settings Refer to p When the Bouncing Ball is Red 90 If nothing is played for a short while the bouncing ball turns red At this time if you play a phrase near the position of the bouncing ball the ball automatically moves to the point in the notation where you are playing 88 Chapter 4 Practice Functions When you play four or more notes while the bouncing ball is red the ball moves to the point where you are playing When you play fewer than four notes the bouncing ball does not jump to the new position and the notation does not scroll The bouncing ball will move within the range of the notation displayed on the external display or television If you start playing at a point that is not currently shown in the external display or television the bouncing ball does not jump to the new position and the notation does not scroll E Making Detailed Settings for the Notation Display You can change the part appearing on the notation display and change the manner in which the notation is displayed 1 e Press the DigiScore button to display the Notation screen 2 e Press the Option button A screen like the one shown below appears Notation Options Jump DR AutoSunc Keyboard fua 3 re ae Expor Switch the screens You can select the parts to be displayed in the notation by touching the four icons at the lower left of the screen Icon Description The
296. s listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 3 and 4 please read and observe the following Power Supply Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter such as a refrigerator washing machine microwave oven or air condi tioner or that contains a motor Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet For this reason the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible Batteries are supplied with the unit The life of these batteries may be limited however since their primary purpose was to enable testing Placement Using the unit ne
297. s of the Greek philosopher Pythagoras and has pure fourths and fifths Chords containing a third will sound impure but melodies will sound good Pythagorean This temperament is a partial compromise of just intonation in order to allow modulation Meantone This temperament is a combination of meantone and Pythagorean temperaments It allows you to play in all keys First method number three Werkmeister Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning system When playing in a temperament other than equal temperament you must specify the tonic the note corresponding to C for a major key or to A for a minor key of the key in which you will play Touch lt Key gt If you have selected equal temperament it is not necessary to select the tonic O Setting the Tuning Curve Stretch Tuning Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches This method of tuning is unique to the piano and is known as stretched tuning A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is called a tuning curve Changing the tuning curve produces subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play Touch the Stretch Tuning lt ON gt or lt OFF gt icon to select the tuning curve When set to ON the tuning curve features extended low and high ranges Stretch Tu
298. s of this unit are made of brass Brass eventually darkens as the result of the natural oxidization process If the brass becomes tarnished polish it using commer cially available metal polisher Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up on an external memory or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory on an external memory Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on an external memory once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or a
299. s sets the USB driver used when you have a computer connected to the USB connector In the factory settings Original is selected Normally there is no need to change the USB driver settings 1 Open the Basic screen or press the One Touch Piano button 2 Touch the Option button 3 Touch lt USB Driver gt 4 Touch D to select the driver type Indication Description Select this when using a generic USB Generic driver included with the OS with a USB connection Select this when using the supplied driver with a USB connection Original g g Under ordinary circumstances use this mode Ap This is an auxiliary mode Original 2 y It is not normally used 5 After changing the settings turn the power off then on again 196 Troubleshooting If you think there s a problem read this first Case Cause Remedy Case Cause Remedy The power doesn t come on Is the power cord connected and plugged in correctly p 21 Screen on connected display or television doesn t look right The button doesn t work Is the panel locked p 181 Turn the power off then back on Nothing appears on screen The KR uses a liquid crystal screen so text may not be displayed when the ambient temperature is below freezing Vertical lines appear in the screen Color is washed out at the edges of the screen These
300. s the rm Play Stop button A two bar count in plays then recording starts Even without pressing the m Play Stop button recording starts when you play the keyboard There is no count in played when you start by playing the keyboard instead of pushing the gt m Play Stop button When recording starts the m Play Stop and Rec buttons indicators light Stop Recording 8 Press the rm Play Stop button 109 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording stops Listening to the Recorded Performance 9 Press the Reset button then press the m Play Stop button The recorded performance is played back When you press the m Play Stop button playback stops Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings 5 When you want to re record specify the Track button for the performance you want to re record and then record again When you select a previously recorded Track button and re record everything from the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will be replaced by the newly re recorded performance Use the lt q Bwd and gt Fwd buttons to go to the measure where you want to begin recording Press the Rec button A screen like the one shown below appears Do you want to record a new sono or add on to the current song KEREN Touch Add on gt Press t
301. screen touch KI C3 for the marker to be moved d 141 D Sonate No 15 AAA 5 gt _ E p jepeat Ri 1 5 D a a a Clear Clear q ke Q a ie lt V When you touch KI the marker is moved to a previous part of the song When you touch gt the marker is moved to a later part of the song Moving Markers A and B without Changing the Interval Between Them 4141 D Sonate No 15 4 4 he 5 Ag a gt Repeat 5 P P P P f f 1 e On the Marker screen touch L in the middle of the screen For example if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure and Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure when you touch KI in the middle of the screen Marker A is moved to the beginning of the first measure and Marker B is moved to the beginning of the fifth measure Touch gt gt to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B to the beginning of the thirteenth measure Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A Marker A Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 Marker A Marker B 100 Chapter 4 Practice Functions E Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over You can play back a particular passage over and over This is convenient when you want to focus on a passage 1 e First set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to repeat For instance suppose you want to play back t
302. se Pop 35 Ibiza Dance 36 Cool Rap 37 Now Hip Hop 38 Twostep 39 HipHop Beat 40 Hip n Hop 41 Easy Hop 42 MorningShffl 43 Groovy Pop 44 Smile Pop 45 Warm Pop 46 Sunny Pop 47 Feel Good 48 US Groove 49 Steady Rock 50 Shuffle Rock 51 Dyno Rock 52 Power Rock D3 Heavy Rock 54 Thump Rock 55 Asian Pop Ballad Acoustic 1 AmericanRock 2 GtrUnplugged 3 Movie Ballad 4 ModernBallad 5 80s Ballad 6 AcoustBallad 7 AcoustEzLstn 8 UnpluggedPop Oldies Country 25 Smooth Jazz Trad World SE A 26 A Cappella 1 Guitar Lady 27 _ Scat Swing 1 OrchMariachi 2 EasySlowRock 28 _ Organ Swing 2 Orch Polka 3 Detroit Pop 29 _ Dixieland 3 Musical 4 60s Rock n SE 4 Pub Boogie 5 DreamSloRock 31 Hula 5 Vienna Waltz 6 CountryRock1 6 Kids Shuffle 7 CntryBallad1 7 Movie March 8 Groovin R amp B 8 Music Hall 9 Oldies 1 Gospel Latin 9 Orch Bolero 0 Clock Rock n 0 Orch Waltz 1 CountryPop 1 1 SimplyChaCha 1 Holiday 1 2 SwinginCntry 2 Latin Pop 1 2 Classic 3 Soul 3 Orch Bossa 3 Jing Ju 4 Rock n Slow 4 AmazinGospel 4 Marchingband 5 Oldies 2 5 Rhumba 5
303. se the recorded sound touch lt OK gt If you don t want to erase the recorded sound touch lt Cancel gt Once a performance has been erased it can t be restored You cannot touch lt Clear gt during playback of the song Touch lt Part gt to make more detailed settings for the selected part A screen like the one shown below appears Hl HENG EE CARERE You can change the Tone for the selected Part by pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed When selecting Part 10 or 11 you can touch lt Drum Set gt to select the drum set or effect sound The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of the screen or the corresponding item to change FREI the setting You can adjust the values by touching the desired parameter and turning the dial or by touching and dragging the slider Display Explanation Volume Changes the volume level Changes the amount of reverb effect Revere applied to the sound Chorus Changes the amount of chorus applied Shifts the direction from which the sound is heard between left and right Panpot Touch to shift the sound to the right or touch to shift it to the left 137 Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs E Getting the Most Suitable Part What s Panpot Tones for the Musical Genre Panpot is the control that determines the placement of Tone S et the sound in the stereo sound field between lef
304. seeteesestenenes 131 Dong Edit screen soireeisoiep n ie oee REE KERRE 145 Song Search SCE cccccssssececcessassssesceterecnesencnsenenenes 81 Song Selection screen ceseeeceeeceseseseeeeteesesesneenes 75 Style Composer screen eseseeseeecete ese eetesesestetenes 154 Style Converter screen seseseceesceteteseeeetesesestenenes 156 Style Search steen ooN asosii mrene 62 Style Selection screen oo cette eeteteeseenetenes 61 Surround Sereen E 36 Tone search Screen nasie Sis geb 30 Tome Selection sereen essasnren mnai 28 Transpose screen s sssssesssesessesseereestsstsseeseestsseseene 102 User Program acreen istina 130 Vocal Effects serene ee EES 47 Write User Program screen ccececcccseeeeecsceseeeees 130 Search Music Styles aese e aie earn Steed 62 GEELEN 81 TONGS deed ee 30 Slide SHOW eerste 178 SME genee eegenen 217 SMF Music files menune praa 217 Soft E 22 SOLO WEE 137 SEA EE 81 Sostenuto Pedal E 22 Sound Control button 00 cece eeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 44 Sound Effects seein fee Age EE 29 Sound Generator eege Eed SEN 217 SP lif enner Esebuer 72 el GE EE 162 Start Stop button cscs ciceescctgschescaeteecbetteeteeerenciesas 65 Stretch DATE 166 Style COMPOSED y iiis ierre e nine KEARE E Ar KEAT 153 Style Converter sorrisos atin oie tn dens Saved Hess 155 Style Orchestr tot oneni a e e i aa 69 Style Orchestrator button oo eee eee 69 Style Seares eis er Aaa caine aA Ea 62 SULTOUNG he toii SR EI 36
305. selectable by SysEx 2 Recognized as M 1 even if Mat Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 218 Main Specifications KR117M KR115M KR115 lt Keyboard gt Keyboard 88 keys Progressive hammer action keyboard with escapement Touch Sensitivity 100 levels Keyboard Mode Whole Split adjustable split point Layer Arranger Piano Style Arranger Manual Drums SFX lt Sound Generator gt Conforms to GM2 GS XG Lite Max Polyphony 128 voices Tones Tone Search by terms and by letters 6 groups 780 variations including 8 tone wheel Organs 17 drum sets SFX set Temperament 8 types selectable tonic Stretched Tuning 2 types Master Tuning 415 3 Hz 466 2 Hz adjustable in increments of 0 1 Hz Transpose Key Transpose 6 5 in units of semitone Playback Transpose 24 24 in units of semitone Effects Reverb 12 types 127 levels Chorus Rotary and 60 other types Surround Advanced 3D Dynamic Emphasis 3 types Equalizer 5 bands Master level lt Arranger gt Music Styles Style Search by terms and by letters 6 groups 310 styles x 3 types Style Orchestrator 6 groups 285 styles x 3 types Style Orchestrator Music Assistant Search by terms and by letters Over 550 sets x 6 presets Visual Music Assistant Programma
306. ser Programs from an external memory first connect the external memory to the external memory port gt For more on working with the external memory refer to Using External Memories p 113 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Load gt A Load User Program screen like the following appears Load User Program 1 USER SET 2 2 USER SET 3 5 USER SET 5 Media External Menory L Execute Specifying the Set of User Programs to be Loaded 4 Touch lt gt lt _ amp gt to select the storage media to be read from Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll through the screen and display other name of User Programs 5 Touch the name of User Program to load 6 Touch lt Execute gt The selected User Programs are loaded to the User Program button Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable Chapter 7 User Program Registration Deleting Saved User Program Sets You can delete individual User Program sets saved to external memories or in user memory When deleting a set of User Programs on an external memory first connect the external memory to the external memory port gt For more on working with the external memory refer to Using External Memories p 113 Press the User
307. shown on the external display or the television connected to the KR 1 Press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Press the Option button 3 Touch lt External Display gt A screen like the following appears External Display Setting Slide Show White Slide Show 4 Touch the parameter o make the settings 5 Press the Exit button to return to the Function screen Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices E Explanation of Each Items Mode You can have different images displayed on the television or external display than those appearing on the KR s own display Settings Value Explanation The display of notations lyrics notation Auto and keyboard and lyric are switched automatically Panel Screens are shown the same way they appear in the KR s display Notation The Notation screen is normally displayed Notation and The notation and keyboard are displayed Keyboard The Lyrics screen is normally displayed Lyric However lyrics are displayed only when y playing back music files that contains lyrics data Slide Show The image is displayed in the slide show Notes When Switching the Display on External Displays and Televisions e Lyrics are not displayed with audio CDs e You cannot display any lyrics screen when playing back music data that does not include lyrics data e The internal songs include a number of jazz pieces that are played in an
308. song it will play at a constant tempo Cancel the Tempo Mute Setting 1 e Hold down the m Play Stop button and press one of the Tempo buttons Tempo muting is canceled Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song 95 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing Count In When you re playing along with a song you can listen to the tempo before you start playing by adding a count in This audible count before the song playback is called a Count In 1 e Press the Count Marker button and watch the indicator light up q D Q a i V The following Count screen appears Ka You can have a count sound be played before the song starts playing back by holding down the kd Reset button while you press the KR Play stop button The status of the Count settings won t be Countdown Countdown affected by your use of this Sound Track procedure Marker ll 2 Touch lt Count Mode gt Ly t to set this to Count In or Count In Down With this setting two measures count down before the song playback starts NEM Cancelling the Count In For more about other settings on the Count settings screen 1 e Press the Count Marker button so its indicator is turned off refer to Changing the Settings By pressing Exit instead of the Count Mark button you can close the Count KE
309. splay cccccssseseseceesseseeeenesesesnenenes 185 External Speakers ee 194 MIDI device EE 188 Television re e aeeoa eaeoe ne Eana a oeei TEE AET 185 Video Equipment ccccccceccccsesceteneesesesnenenees 187 Contrast sareen ia e eaer ele e E Eae 25 Contrast KOOD tetai annta eosdebet 25 Copy Song Edit ee 146 Copying SONES paee Eaa E Ee 120 User Program ceiid liscsesc te esetet aisneis 133 WSOP SEV E AE E 160 Count ise toee err sis geesde 96 Countdown ETA EE 67 D Damper pedal sissies teneis eoa eisa beeen lias 22 Damper Resonance EE 22 Delete Song Edit EE 147 Deleting E 119 User Style reese eer 159 DigiScore button occ ce eee ce ceeeeneeeceeenees 87 Disc RE 17 78 DIVISIONS eet Ae ae Mek eet eech 57 Der Set ist eege Eder 205 BIN E 29 Dynamic Emphasis e 43 E che ie ee Si ates A A Bea 48 Editing esos fs oe eet Leen gaat chee ee a aeei sieis TEA 145 LE 46 Effect Eist ooreo eae eegen eege 209 Effects Part EE 179 Hject Button ccceeescscsseeseseseecesetesseseecenesssseeesseneaseeeess 78 CID DIA E 17 Emergency Eject Holle ccsccsecesceceteseeeenetesesesnenenes 78 Emergency eject holen 17 INAT i ot AN E E bias eda iacndepeataes 57 66 Equalizer one E A EE EREE ATE 44 Erase Song Edit eege ee Sieger merto oei ea 148 Erasing Performance on specific tracks occ 111 Recorded performance ccccccccese cesses 111 Error Messages EE 201 EXpOTt Seege lied eier 92 Expression Pedal ee 185 Ext Display Connector
310. spose the data from 24 two octaves down to 24 two octaves up adjustable in semitones You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and sound effect sets such as the Rhythm Track 148 E Making Measures Blank Erase You can delete the performance data in a specified block of measures turning them into blank measures without reducing the length of the song This process is called erasing Ex To erase measures bars 5 8 ENENENEN 617 EME Mu aa Blank measures Follow the steps in Selecting the Editing Function p 145 to choose lt Erase gt A screen like the one shown below appears Item Content Measure number of the first measure of the From segment to be erased For Number of measures to be erased Track button or part number to be erased Tr Pt When All is selected the same portion of all parts is erased Select from the following types of performance data to erase All All performance data including notes tempos tones switches volume changes etc are erased Tempo Tempo data is erased Erasing the tempo data for Event all measures results in a single constant tempo Prog Change Erases the data for switching Tones p 145 Note Erases only notes Except Note Erases all of the performance data except for the notes Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs Item Content Expr
311. sult in poor insulation and lead to fire At regular intervals you should unplug the power Q entangled Also all cords and cables should be Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming placed so they are out of the reach of children caster wheels should be locked or fixed in place once the unit has been placed at the place of installation or has been loaded onto a vehicle If the unit could become a hazard if it moves all Q unit Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the S CAUTION Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet d hands when plugging into or unplugging from an L outlet or this unit Before moving the unit disconnect the power plug from the outlet and pull out all cords from external Z devices Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet p 21 Z Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area pull the plug on the power cord out of the Z outlet If used improperly batteries may explode or leak and cause damage or injury In the interest of safety please read and observe the following precautions e Carefully follow the installation instructions for S batteries and make sure you observe the correct polarity Q e Avoid using new batteries together with used ones In addition avoid mixing different types of batteries e Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period o
312. t p 57 or to internal songs or music files With this effect called Advanced 3D you seem to be surrounded by the sound of the performance 1 e Press the Surround Reverb button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt Surround gt Q gt appears in the screen 3 On the Surround Screen touch the Type icon lt Advanced 3D gt When headphones are connected Three dimensional breadth is added to the sound O Adding Depth to Sounds Played Through Headphones When you have headphones connected the screen for selecting the type of surround effect changes as shown below Surround Cea You cannnot select the Type icon lt Surround gt or lt Ensemble gt when headphones are connected 39 Chapter 1 Performance E Selecting the Part for the Effect 1 e Press the Surround Reverb button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt Surround gt to display the Surround screen 3 e Press the Option button The following screen appears Surround Option Surround Option l nt gp E S Accomp fi ON OFF 4 Touch the icon to switch the effect on or off for each individual part When you press the Exit button the Advanced 3D effect is activated and you return to the previous screen Cancelling the Effect 5 e Touch the Type icon lt Advanced 3D gt and watch the light go out NEM The Advanced 3D effect is not
313. t 3 EXC1 Brush Closed Hi hat EXC1 Timpani F Scratch Pull EXC7 Low Tom 1 Brush Low Tom 1 Timpani G Sticks Pedal Hi hat 2 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 2 EXC1 Timpani G Square Click Mid Tom 2 Brush Mid Tom 2 Timpani A Metronome Click Open Hi hat 3 EXC1 Brush Open Hi hat EXC1 Timpani A Metronome Bell Mid Tom 1 Brush Mid Tom 1 Timpani B Guitar sliding Finger High Tom 2 Brush High Tom 2 Timpani c Guitar cutting noise up Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Crash Cymbal Timpani c Guitar cutting noise down High Tom 1 Brush High Tom 1 Timpani d String slap of double bass Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Ride Cymbal Timpani d Fl Key Click Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Timpani e Laughing Ride Bell Brush Ride Bell Timpani f Screaming Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Punch Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Heart Beat Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Footsteps1 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Concert Cymbal 2 Footsteps2 Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Applause Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Concert Cymbal 1 Door Creaking High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 High Bongo 1 Door Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Scratch Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Mute High Conga 1 Wind Chimes Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Car Engine Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Low Conga 1 Car Stop High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale Car Pass Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Car Crash High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo Siren Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Train Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Jetplane Maracas
314. t and Tone Set is a function that automatically assigns the most right speakers By altering the Panpot setting you can suitable tones for the selected musical style change the perceived location of the sound between When you re creating a song you can assign Tone sets then the left and right speakers change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song 1 Display the 16 track Sequencer screen p 136 When you press the m Play Stop button you 2 Touch lt Tone Set gt in the lower part of the screen hear what the song sounds like as you change the settings When you press the m Play Stop A screen like the one shown below appears button playback of the song stops 5 Touch L L to make settings for other parts The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen Change the settings for other parts as needed 6 Hold down the Rec button and press the ta Reset button This operation set the changes in the settings The song can then be saved to an external memory or to a Touchthescreen to selecta musical genre user memory If you do not want to delete a song after changing the 4 Press the Exit button settings for the individual parts save the song to an The 16 track Sequencer screen appears external memory or to user memory p 116 Tones for each part are assigned automatically You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds In some genr
315. tails refer to Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment p 57 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording Along with a Song Try recording along with internal songs and songs on external memories Here record your right hand performance along with the song accompaniment Settings for Recording Performances 1 e Select a song For more on how to select songs refer to p 75 2 Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance 3 Press the DigiScore button to display the notation Nia For instructions on displaying the notation refer to p 87 The song tempo is stored within the song you selected Recording Settings 4 Press the Rec button A screen like the one shown below appears Do you want to record a nev song or add on to the current song 5 e Touch lt Add On gt With this setting you can record while listening to the selected song Selecting the Track to Record 6 Press the track button for the track that you want to record i e the track that you want to play yourself The indicator of the button you pressed will blink and the KR enters recording standby mode Only drum sets or SFX set are Since in this example we will record the upper part performance press the 4 recorded to the R Rhythm Upper button to make the button s indicator light blink button To cancel recording press the Rec button once more Start Recording 7 Pres
316. the program on the KR OConnecting an Expression Pedal You can connect an expression pedal to the KR Connect the Expression pedal to the Expression Pedal jack on the jack panel of the KR Use only the specified expression pedal EV 7 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Connecting an External Display or Television You can connect a computer monitor or other external display or a television to the KR enabling you to display the Song Select screen your favorite images song lyrics and notations on a larger screen gt You can switch screens with the remote control For details see Using the Remote Control p 84 You cannot simultaneously use both an external display and a television with the KR Moreover neither the external display nor the television will be able to display properly if both are connected at the same time When using an external display connect the display to the Ext Display connector but do not connect a television to the Video Out connector If using a television connect the television to the Video Out connector but do not connect any external display to the Ext Display connector For more information about external display settings refer to Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display and the Television External Display p 186 E Connecting an External Dis
317. the bouncing ball is red and you whereby the notation layi h int in th lls Jump start playing a phrase at a point in the Se Ge notation close to where the ball is Sg oma ne SR syon 3 located the ball moves to the point P a ee i 500515 where you are playing This position is PO PAYEE RACS determined after you play at least four notes of the phrase The notation screen scrolls Next Note automatically from the current position in the song as you play Lyrics On The lyrics are displayed This setting determines whether or not lyrics in songs that contain lyrics Off Not displayed data appear in the notation Finger Numbers On The fingering is displayed This setting determines whether or not the fingering in songs that Off Not displayed contain fingering data appears in the notation Chords On The chord names are displayed This setting determines whether or not chord names in songs that Off Not displayed contain chord data appears in the notation Off Not displayed Pitches C D E The pitch names C D E are displayed Sets whether or not the note names appear in the Do Re Mi The pitch names fixed Do are music when the notation Fixed displayed is expanded Do Re Mi The syllable names movable Do are Movable displayed Chapter 4 Practice Functions Item Setting Basic Controls each of the pedal movements You can start and stop pl
318. the song touch lt Cancel gt and either save the song to an external memory p 116 or register the song to the Favorites p 82 Recorded performances are discarded when another song is selected or when the power is turned off Be sure to save important performances on an external memory p 116 or register the song to the Favorites p 82 You cannot record while playing along with audio files and audio CDs You cannot save songs to CDs and you cannot delete songs recorded to CDs Furthermore you cannot format CDs Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording a New Song New Song This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or Automatic Accompaniment ER 0 0 0 0 Reset Play Stop Rec Settings for Recording Performances 1 e Press One Touch Program Piano button This sets the KR for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment 2 Decide on the tone of the performance p 28 Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone When you have finished choosing the settings press the Exit button to display the Basic screen Recording Settings 3 Press the e Rec button If you press the Rec button when a song has already been selected the following message appears V If you select lt New Song gt Do you want to record when a song has already been a nev song or add o
319. them to Favorites You can also copy songs in Favorites to external memories 1 e Connect the external memory with the song to be copied to the external memory port 2 Press the Song File button 3 Touch lt File gt The Song File screen appears 4 Touch lt Copy gt The following Copy Song screen appears Copy Song USCOE External Memory e D ri on J Favorites A me RES omg Execute Specifying the Copy Source 5 e Touch the lt Media gt Ka ca to select the copy source storage media 6 Touch the lt File gt aLe to select the song you want to copy When Copy All is selected songs within the selected folder on the external memory are copied to Favorites Specifying the Copy Destination 7 e Touch lt Favorites gt EJ 8 song o select the copy destination for the If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that location the previously saved song will be erased If you don t want to erase a previously saved song choose a number with no song name appears in the destination column 120 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance 8 e Touch lt Execute gt Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the copy is finished The song from the external memory is copied to Favorites E Copying Songs Saved in Favorites
320. ther The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony Variety The harmony added is matched to the pitch for example higher pitches are used for female voices lower pitches for male voices The added harmony matches the chords specified on the Trio keyboard This adds a two voice harmony that makes it seem that a trio is singing The added harmony matches the chords specified on the keyboard You can change the way harmonies are added with the Melody Intelligence type p 70 Chords Cancelling the Effect 3 Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again The Harmonist function is cancelled Press the Exit button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen O Enabling the Start of Songs and Automatic Accompaniment with the Sound of Your Voice Vocal Count In You can start songs and the Automatic Accompaniment by counting into the microphone 1 e Touch lt Vocal Count In gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 47 Vocal Count In ID Le Arranger Song 50 Chapter 1 Performance 2 Touch lt Arranger gt or lt Song gt Display Explanation Arranger Automatic Accompaniment starts at the tempo used for the count Song The song starts at the tempo used for the count 3 Count to four One two three four into the microphone Count out the number of beats per measure in the time signature of the selected song or
321. ti dieders ee lise ine nsi iee 159 SAVING whe aTeo aT ENET EE 158 V Maat Sector Ee SlEeeeech 57 Variation button 20 0 ce cccecceseeceesceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeaees 68 Video Out Jack wise geesde Ee eet 16 Ke DO 187 Vocal Count EE 50 Vocal Effect eecht oaan 47 Vocal Effect button ssssseseesssessssssressssesseessesesessseseees 47 Vocal Keyboard EE 51 Volume Metronome siessen oes n eene 55 Microphone c ccccscssesesesesteteeseeseneseseeceneneseseaneneneseees 23 Kielener ee 22 Remote Controls gras ele ege sed 86 224 Volume Kn Ob oo eeeeeeceeeesceececeseeseceeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaeeesentees 22 X KEE ee ie e e Ae Se Sa ERE EE 217 Z ZOOM ee GI CTI ee ESE a ER 90 Information EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 11 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 FAX 011 403 1234 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd Royal Cape Park Unit 24 Londonderry Road Ottery 7800 Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 799 4900 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 3 Section Anhuax
322. time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncom fortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist This unit either alone or in combination with an S Do not allow any objects e g flammable Ey material coins pins or liquids of any kind S Lei water soft drinks etc to penetrate the unit cord from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page when Immediately turn the power off remove the power e The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or e If smoke or unusual odor occurs e Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or e The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or e The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the
323. to Choose the Part That Makes the Keys Move Upon power up the instrument is set so the keys move along with the performances of the Whole Upper and Lower tracks You can choose a different part to make the keys move by pressing the Track buttons and changing the buttons that are lighted 1 Choose the song to play p 75 2 Press the Track button you want to have associated with key movement a number of times until the button s light is flashing Each time you press a Track button its light changes to the next state in this order lighted gt extinguished gt flashing gt lighted gt The following shows the relationship between the Track buttons played parts and keyboard movement Indicator Keyboard Sound Indicator flashing Movement Sound Indicator on No movement Sound Indicator off No movement No sound 3 Press the m Play Stop button Song playback starts and the keys move along with what is played as a result of the flashing Track button or buttons 176 Using the 16 Track Sequencer Screen to Choose the Part That Makes the Keys Move You can get the keys to move along with the performance of parts selected with the 16 Track Sequencer screen 1 Choose the song to play p 75 2 Press the Menu button The Composer Menu or the A V Sync screen appears 3 Touch lt 16tr Sequencer gt A screen like the one shown below appears 27148 T
324. to External Memories Songs that ve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto external memories In this case in the Copy Song screen in Step 4 above touch the arrow icon in the center to point the arrow upwards This sets the KR to copy the song in Favorites to the external memory Copy Song STE External Memory e D The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from external memories to Favorites Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable Some song data cannot copy because they are copy protected 121 Chapter 6 Creating Performance Data Including Moving Keys A V sync With this instrument you can create performance data that like the CD included with the KR contains Moving Keys data By connecting a Roland CD 2 or similar recording device you can record not just your piano performances you can also connect a microphone to record vocals along with the piano performance Moreover you can connect video equipment to the KR and record video images along with the other data as well Recording E Making the Connections When connecting audio recording devices To simultaneously record using a mic or other musical instrument connect as shown below Jack Panel Front Aux Input Audio cable kd ke D I a e V LINE OUT OUT PUT
325. tored in external memory connect the external memory to the external memory port Touch lt Music Files gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 47 Music Files Select the performance part to be used for the harmony Variety Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony When you play back the song and sing into the microphone harmonies are added using the pitches of the specified part Touch lt Variety gt When lt Variety gt is ON the melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony The harmony added is matched to the pitch Cancelling the Effect 5 52 Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again The Music Files function is cancelled Press the Exit button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen Chapter 1 Performance E Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files 1 2 Connect a microphone Adjust the volume level and the amount of echo applied On the KR use the Vocal Effect function to adjust the echo p 48 You can also enjoy this effect with the Voice Transformer function p 48 and Harmonist function p 49 Select a song To select a song stored in external memory connect the external memory to the external memory port For instructions on how to select songs refer to Playing a Song p 75 Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo buttons If necessary change the key of the song Transpose p 102 When yo
326. touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through English upper case English lower case nua numerals symbols then back to English upper Casel When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position 5 When you have finished with the name press the Exit button Determining the Save Destination KJ gt to select the save destination strage media 6 Touch lt Media gt Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles o select the save destination number If a Style name is displayed a style is already saved to that number If you select a number with a previously saved User Style and then save to that number the previously saved User Style is deleted If you do not want to delete the User Style being saved select a number in the save destination column that does not yet have a name Touch lt Execute gt The saving process starts Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable E Deleting Saved User Styles This deletes User Styles that have been saved to external memories or in user memory When deleting a User Style on an external memory first connect the external memory to the external memory port 1 Press the Music St
327. transpose the pitch to a range that is comfortable for the singer while still playing the notes as written i e with the same fingering positions 5660605 8 65056 q D O a i V First make sure you have selected the song to be transposed p 75 1 e Press the Transpose button A Transpose screen like the one below appears Transpose UU 2 Touch one of the three icons to select the song or sounds to be transposed Icon Target Settings Value Keyboard sound 6 0 5 Song to be played back 24 0 24 Keyboard sounds songs being played back 6 0 5 102 Chapter 4 Practice Functions 3 Touch the screen keyboard or to select the transposition value Each time you press I it transposes the key by a semitone a value of 0 is set When you touch You can also use the dial to change the transposition value When you transpose a song or the keyboard the Transpose button s indicator lights up As you play the keyboard or play back the song the notes are transposed When you press the Exit button the transposition remains in effect and you re returned to the previous screen Cancelling Transposition The transposition value reverts Transposition is cancelled to 0 when you turn off the power or select another song v Aedou3 4 Press the Transpose button and the indicator light go
328. tro When set for Sync Start the indicators of both the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button are flashing you can use the following procedure to change the intro or prevent the intro from playing Starting without an Intro Press the Intro Ending button and watch the indicator go out Now when you play a chord with the keyboard the accompaniment starts without the intro To Start with a Short Intro Added Touch lt Arranger gt in the Basic screen to open the arranger screen Touch the Intro lt 2 gt Drio ee gt inal tion Leading Bass fa fe fe fo Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard a short intro is played and the accompaniment starts 65 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment O Starting at the Press of a Button 1 e Press the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button simultaneously and the indicators lights go out The Sync Start function is cancelled 2 Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing 3 Press the Intro Ending button or the Start Stop button When you press the Intro Ending button the intro plays and the accompaniment starts When you press the Start Stop button the accompaniment starts without the intro When you touch Intro lt 2 gt on the Basic screen a short intro plays Chord Tones and Bass Tones When you play the keys in the left hand side of the keyboard w
329. ts and the countdown sound plays at the end of the intro O Cancelling the Countdown For more about settings on the Countdown screen refer to 3 e Press the Count Marker button and the indicator light goes out Changing the Settings forthe Count p 164 67 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Modifying an Accompaniment Va When you use Automatic Accompaniment you can easily add Fill Ins to the You can add variation to the accompaniment patterns change arrangements and make other changes Automatic Accompaniment by assigning different functions to the Performance Pads and e e E Changing the Accompaniment Pattern pedals RonmciCintommation Fill In Button s see Assigning Functions to F So SEN ee Pedals and Performance Pads There are two accompaniment patterns the Original and a Variation In addition a Pedal Setting User fill in or short phrase is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns GE Functions p 167 change which adds more interest to the song It can be effective to use the simpler original pattern for the first half of the song and the variation pattern for the second half What s a Fill In A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a Fill In The KR automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style Press the Fill In To Variation button and watch the indicat
330. ttings for the Notation Display p 89 You cannot display the notation for audio files nor audio CD s song 87 Chapter 4 Practice Functions E Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds ar Touch the Notes el In the Notation screen you can have notes played by touching the notes on the screen When you display the keyboard in the screen p 90 the keys on the keyboard for the notes you touch are then shown in the display This allows you confirm notes by sight sound and touch In addition when you trace part of the notation with your finger the traced segment is played back This allows you to easily play back phrases you like 47138 A Sonate No 15 q D o a i V E Scrolling the Notation Along with the Performances AutoSync DigiScore You can have the notation displayed in the screen scroll automatically as you play even when the song is not being played back No more frantically trying to turn to the next page in the notation while you are performing This also lets you play difficult passages more slowly and otherwise practice at your own pace Auto Sync DigiScore is linked to the performance of the part shown in the screen The notation does not scroll if you are playing a part that is not currently displayed When the Bouncing Ball is Blue Start playing at the point where the ball is bouncing MEMD Y h the AutoS The bouncing ball follows along and the notation scroll
331. tton extinguished p 97 If the button light is out the music on that track is not heard Press the track button so the light is illuminated Have song settings been changed for each Part on the 16 Track sequencer screen p 137 Pressing the Id Reset button doesn t return to the beginning of the song Some music files may contain settings that stop play at a point partway through the song Press the I Reset button several times more to return to the beginning of the tune Has a Marker placed in the song p 98 correctly The automatic accompaniment doesn t play Can t select a tone or Music Style Press the Exit button several times to return to the Basic screen p 25 and then select a tone or Music Style Automatic accompaniment is not heard Has the Balance knob been moved all the way to the right p 73 The pb Fwd and a Bwd buttons don t work The fast forward and reverse buttons are ignored while music files is being read in Wait until processing finishes If you attempt to play back performance data that contains more data than the entire capacity of the KR s memory you may find that operations other than playback such as rewind or fast forward become unavailable Have you pressed the One Touch Program Arranger button If the One Touch Program Arranger button has not been pressed only the rhythm pattern is played p
332. turns to the beginning of the Division p 57 Intro 1 Performs the same function as the Intro Ending button p 65 Intro 1 and Ending Ending 1 1 are played Intro 2 Performs the same function as the Intro A Ending button p 65 Intro 2 and Ending Ending 2 2 are played Arranger Performs the same function as the Start Start Stop Stop button p 65 Orchestrator This changes the accompaniment to a more Up elavorate arrangement p 69 Orchestrator Changes the accompaniment to a simpler Down arrangement p 69 Melody Turns the Melody Intelligence function on Intelligence and off p 70 167 OL423d_y gt Chapter 10 Various Settings Function Explanation O Functions that Can be Assigned Pedals ni This starts Automatic Accompaniment 2 y with a fade in where the volume gets z 7 Fade In Out progressively louder ends it with a fade Function Explanation out where the volume gets progressively Pressing the pedal during playback of a song softer then stops stops the playback When the pedal is released playback resumes from the D Ei Rotary Slow This switches the speed of the rotary effect beginning of the measure that was playing Fast when you perform with an organ tone SE when the pedal was pressed When the pedal While the pedal or Performance Pad is held is pressed in rapid succession
333. u press the m Play Stop button the accompaniment starts playing Sing along with the accompaniment When you play back a Music File with lyrics the lyrics appear on screen Press the rm Play Stop button to stop the accompaniment MEMD Commercial music files designed for karaoke sing along are also available Consult your KR dealer when purchasing music files Refer to Music Files That the KR Can Use p 217 em On the KR lyrics can also be shown on an external display Refer to Connecting an External Display p 185 and Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display and the Television External Display p 186 MEMD You can stop lyrics from being displayed Refer to Hiding the Lyrics Lyrics p 182 53 Chapter 1 Performance Using the Metronome The KR features a built in metronome During playback of the song and accompaniment the metronome plays at that tempo and beat E Using the Metronome 1 e Press the Metronome button and watch the indicator light up You will hear the metronome The following Metronome screen appears 27108 M Sonate No 15 4 4 M 1 Pattern Normal Beat LED ON You can press the Exit button to have the metronome continue to play while you return to the previous screen Stopping the Metronome 2 Press the Metronome button once more and the
334. uare 116 Bowed Glass 50 CC Solo 117 Metal Pad 51 Sleeper 118 Orbiting 52 Dual Sqr amp Saw 119 Visionary 53 Jupiter Lead 120 Halo Pad 54 Sinetific 121 JP8 Sqr Pad 55 FM Lead 1 122 Vox Sweep 56 FM Lead 2 123 Consolament 57 Saw Wave 124 JP 8 Phase 58 Saw 125 Sweep Pad 59 Doctor Solo 126 Sweep Pad 2 60 Mg Lead 127 Ice Rain 61 P5 Saw Lead 128 Clavi Pad 62 JP SuperSaw 129 Toy Box 63 Rhythmic Saw 130 Soundtrack 64 Natural Lead 131 Crystal 65 SequencedSaw 132 Syn Mallet 66 Waspy Synth 133 ChristmasBel 67 Velo SawLead 134 Clear Bells 68 Attack Lead 135 Himalaya Ice 69 DelyResoSaws 136 Glittery Pad 70 Wezcoast 137 Atmosphere 71 Syn Calliope 138 Harpvox 72 JP8 Pulse 139 Nylon Harp 73 LM PureLead 140 Nylon EP 74 Orgaenia 141 HollowReleas 75 Chiffer Lead 142 Tubulence 76 Cheese Saw 143 Landing Pad 77 JP OctAttack 144 Shangri La 78 Charang 145 Motion Pad 79 Reso Saw 146 Brightness 80 Wire Lead 147 Org Bells 81 2600 SubOsc 148 Goblin 82 Solo Vox 149 Saturn Siren 83 RAVE Vox 150 RandomEnding 84 5th Saw Wave 151 Echo Drops 85 Freeze Synth 152 Echo Bell 86 Bass amp Lead 153 Echo Pan 203 s J pu ddy Tone List
335. uch lt Format gt 4 Touch H to select User 5 Touch lt Execute gt A screen like the one shown below appears Favorite Songs Music Stules User Prosrams User images and other data saved in User memory will be completely erased Do you want to proceed Cancel 6 Touch lt OK gt All of the content in the user memory is deleted If you touch lt Cancel gt the deletion is cancelled and you re returned to the previous screen Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable Yy Carrying out this operation does not initialize any settings other than the user memory settings To restore settings other than those for the user memory to the original factory settings carry out Factory Reset p 172 180 Automatically Starting the Quick Tour You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts automatically with no operation required 1 Hold down the Transpose button and press the Surround Reverb button The Quick Tour screen appears 2 Press the Option button A screen like the one shown below appears futo Start Setting ON ON eie Ea Auto Start BGM of each parameter to make settings Item Display Explanation This setting determines whether or not Quick Tour starts when no adjustment or other operation is performed within a fixed period of t
336. ug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet For the U K WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Copyright 2005 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About Z WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices A CAUTION Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe Z WARNING injury should th
337. und Reverb button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt Surround gt Se On the Surround Screen press the Option button The following screen appears Surround Option Surround Option Spe CAE draak z I Accomp CH recom A SS eel Va ON OFF No surround effect is applied 4 f eee even if the Type icon indicates e Touch the icon to switch individual parts on or off On ifall parisare switched When you press the Exit button the Surround effect is activated and you return to off the previous screen 5 e Touch a part s icon to switch the surround on and off When you select the The sounds of parts set to ON are played from the external speaker and the KR s Surround you can adjust internal speaker Parts set to OFF are played only from the KR s speaker the volume of the external and built in speakers p 38 When you press the Exit button the surround effect is activated and you return to the previous screen E Selecting the Tone to Which the Effect is Applied With Keyboard in Surround set to On you can select the parts to which the surround effect is to be applied 1 e Press the Surround Reverb button and watch the indicator light up 2 Touch lt Surround gt to display the Surround screen 3 On the Surround Screen press the Option button Touch L L to display the following screen 37 Chapter 1 Performance Surrou
338. und Voice Japanese 5 Press the Exit button to go back to the Marker screen Specify the countdown sound Voice English Countdown Track Lower amp Upper Tracks Specify the track or part that aie Lower Track will determine the beginning Upper Track of the performance when Part 1 16 added a countdown Stick Click Electronic Voice Japanese Voice Count In Sound English Wood Block Specify the count in sound Triangle amp Castanets Hand clap Animal Measures Specify the length number of 1 2 measures of the count in 164 Chapter 10 Various Settings Parameter Name Value Other Settings Repeat When Repeat is turned ON on the Marker screen p 101 this specified whether the count in will sound each time the range between the markers is repeated or only the first time You can change the tuning the language shown on the display and other settings to make the KR easier to use First Time Each Time E Procedure 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Press the Option button A Functions screen like the following appears Functions External Display Lake When you press the Option button on the Basic screen the first page displayed shows the parameters for the Automatic Accompaniment settings p 161 Parameter Explanation Tuning Changing the tunin
339. urn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections USB cables are not included Consult your Roland dealer if you need to purchase Turn on the power to the KR before starting up MIDI applications on the computer Do not turn the KR on or off while any MIDI application is running Ifnot using USB disconnect the USB cable from the KR If during the transmission reception of data the computer switches to energy saving mode or suspended mode or if the ER z power is switched on or off the computer may freeze or the KR s operation may become unstable Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable or turn off the power during the transmission reception of data For more on system requirements refer to the USB Installation Guide However note that the KR is not compatible with Mac OS 9 195 Chapter 11 Connecting External Devices Connection examples KR s Jack Panel Front MIDI Phones MicVolume Mic Auxinput ou m USB Expression 0 0 0 ee o USB connector USB Connector of your Computer Te Computer 1 Turn off the power to the KR and the computer 2 Start up the computer 3 Connect the KR and the computer with a USB cable 4 Turn on the power to the KR gt Refer to the owner s manual that came with your computer E Making the Settings for the USB Driver Thi
340. ute Triangle1 EXC5 Open High HuYinLuo 3 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Open Triangle 1 EXC5 Mute High HuYinLuo Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Mute Low HuYinLuo 1 Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Bell Tree Bell Tree Bar Chime Bell Tree Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Sagat oo Gg aoe aoe Close Sagat oo aoe aoe Ban Gu 1 oo coe ooo SC Ban Gu 3 oo coe ooo BE KA o K E 0 a a lt 206 Drum Set List No sound D EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number POWER ELECTRONIC TR 808 909 DANCE 21 s is See D weed Bam B X Ee ie 24 Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime E Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll 26 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap B High High Q High Q High Q 28 Slap Slap Slap Slap 29 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push 2 EXC7 Scratch Push 2 EXC7 Scratch Push 2 EXC7 GEG Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull 2 EXC7 Scratch Pull 2 EXC7 Scratch Pull 2 EXC7 31 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks ER Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click 33 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click gt MEZAN Metronome Bell Metronom
341. uto Start is set to ON the demo starts playing automatically If there is any performance you have recorded at that time a confirmation screen asking you if you want to delete the song appears in the display If you want to return to the previous screen and continue with the recorded performance touch lt Cancel gt If you touch lt OK gt the song is deleted and the demo song begins 200 Error Messages Indication Meaning Error 01 You can only read the music file It can not be saved Error 02 An error occurred during writing The storage media s protect tab may be in the Protect writing prohibited position or the storage media may not yet be initialized No storage media is inserted Prror 10 Insert the storage media and try again Error 11 There is not sufficient free memory in the save destination Either insert other storage media or delete unneeded files and try again Error 14 An error occurred during writing The storage media may be corrupted Insert other storage media and try again Alternatively you can initialize the storage media Error 15 The file is unreadable The data format is not compatible with the KR E 16 Data was not called up in time for playback of the song ITOT ES After waiting several seconds you may be able to play back the song by pressing the m button again Error 17 The selected image data cannot be display
342. vated and you return to the previous screen Cancelling the Effect 4 Press the Surround Reverb button and watch the indicator light go out The reverb effect is eliminated 35 Chapter 1 Performance Adding the Surround Sound Effect to the Accompaniment Using External Speakers Surround You can connect an amp or external speaker to the Aux Output jacks and play accompaniment and reverb sounds through it By using an external speaker this way it will seem that you are surrounded by the accompaniment or reverb This is called the surround effect E Giving More Breadth to the Accompaniment Sound 1 e Connect amp or external speaker to the Aux output jacks 2 Press the Surround Reverb button and watch the indicator light up 3 Touch lt Surround gt The Surround Screen appears Surround For more on speaker settings when the Surround function is used refer to Connecting External Speakers p 194 Creat 4 Touch the Type icon lt Surround gt 5 e When you have selected the type press the Exit button Only Advanced 3D can be switched on and off when Cancelling the Effect 6 Touch the Type icon lt Surround gt and watch the light go out EEN Aux Output jacks The surround effect is eliminated and the effect is no longer applied to any of the parts 36 Chapter 1 Performance E Selecting the Part for the Effect 1 e Press the Surro
343. verdrive2 This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion Distortion2 This is a distortion effect that provides heavy dis tortion Speaker Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to Simulator record the speaker sound Guitar Amp This is an effect that simulates the sound of a guitar Simulator amplifier A phase shifted sound is added to the original Phaser sound and modulated Multi Stage Extremely high settings of the phase difference Phaser produce a deep phaser effect 3D Delay This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound Infinite Phaser A phaser that continues raising lowering the fre quency at which the sound is modulated Tape Echo A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape delay sound Stereo Flanger It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing Reverse Delay This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and de layed sound to the input sound 3D Flanger This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound Lo Fi This is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality for creative purposes 2Band Flanger A flanger that lets you apply an effect independent ly to the low frequency and high frequency ranges Telephone This applies a telephone sound Auto Wah Cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre Gate Reverb This is a special type of reverb in which the rever
344. ves When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears of the cursor potion For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C gt A Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters nu through upper case lower case numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch lt Ins gt a space is inserted at the cursor position 5 When you have finished with the name press the Exit button You re returned to the Write User Program screen Determining the Write Destination 6 Touch to select the write destination number 7 Touch lt Execute gt The current performance settings are saved to the User Program button Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Writing gt Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable gt You can restore the content registered to the User Program button to the original factory settings Refer to Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset p 172 Chapter 7 User Program Registration Calling Up Saved User Programs You can easily call up settings saved to the User Program button 1 Press the User Program button The User Program screen appears
345. watch the indicator light go out The Vocal Effect function is cancelled O Adjusting the Echo Echo 1 e Touch lt Echo gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 47 E Min Echo Type GEZ 2 Touch the Echo Type lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt to change the echo type Displayed Explanation 1 Adds basic reverberations 2 Adds reverberations for a karaoke type echo 3 Touch the bar graph to adjust the amount of echo applied to the vocal Press the Exit button to return to the Vocal Effects screen O Altering Vocals Transformer You can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone This is called the Voice Transformer function 1 e Touch lt Transformer gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 47 Transformer el ebe Robot Duck Computer a 43 Chapter 1 Performance 2 Touch any one of the icons Here s what the different icons do Display Explanation Kids Transforms the input into the sound of a child s voice Bear Transforms the input sound into the voice of a large animal Robot Transforms the input into the sound of a robot s voice Duck Transforms the input into a duck s quacking sound Alien Transforms the input into an alien voice Computer Transforms the input into a voice like that from a computer Female Transforms male voices into female voices Male Transforms female voices i
346. with automatic accompaniment p 58 33 34 35 36 37 39 30 Melody Intelligence button Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard p 70 Record Playback 31 Menu button You can select functions for playing back recording or editing a song p 111 p 136 p 153 p 182 32 Track buttons Used to play back or record each track of a song p 97 p 110 33 a Reset button Resets the song playback start location to the beginning of the song 34 gt m Play Stop button Starts and stops playback or recording a song 35 Rec button When pressed this button places the instrument in recording standby p 105 p 136 36 lt lt Bwd button Rewinds the song 37 p gt Fwd button Fast forwards the song 38 Infrared Receiver Point the remote control at this sensor when using the remote control to operate the KR p 85 39 Wonderland Game button Here you can learn about instruments while having fun See the Quick Start 40 External Memory port Connects an external memory to play p 75 and save songs p 113 De sure to close the cover of the External Memory port after connecting external memory to the External Memory port 15 Panel Descriptions Jack Panel Left Side of Bottom Panel Jack Panel Front Phones Mic Volume Mic Aux Input Der X7 Min L ei ite S SME R L Mono Input 8 9 10 1 Phones jacks A set
347. xecute Item Content Measure number of the first measure of the From KR segment to be quantized For Number of measures to be quantized Track button or part number to be quantized Tr Pt Choosing All quantizes the same passage in all Parts Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Songs Item Content Quantization timing Select one of the following values 1 2 half note 1 4 quarter note 1 6 quarter note triplet 1 8 eighth note 1 12 eighth note triplet 1 16 sixteenth note 1 24 sixteenth note triplet 1 32 thirty second note Resolution When finished with the Quantize settings return to the Song Edit screen E Deleting Measures Delete You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure When a portion of a performance is deleted the rest of the performance is shifted up to fill the gap Erasing measures in a specified passage is called deleting Ex To delete measures bars 5 8 1 2 3 4 5ie6l7 a o io eee i 2 3 4 5 le At Step 3 of Selecting the Editing Function p 145 select lt Delete gt A screen like the one shown below appears Delete HK From For All All Tr Pt Execute Item Content From Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be deleted For Number of measures to be deleted Track button or part number to be deleted Tr Pt When All is selected
348. y p 98 19 Beat indicator This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the selected song or accompaniment 20 Metronome button Activates the built in metronome p 54 21 Tempo buttons Adjusts the tempo Press the and buttons at the same time to return to the original tempo Panel Descriptions 23 24 27 28 31 32 38 40 Exit O O Option 2526 29 30 22 Main Buttons See the Quick Start Song File button Use this button to select internal songs or songs from external memories p 75 DigiScore button Displays notations p 87 Visual Lesson button You can use the practice function Piano Designer button p 181 Music Assistant button Super Tones button 23 Touch Screen This lets you perform a variety of operations just by touching the screen p 25 24 Dial Use this to change on screen values 25 Exit button Returns you to the previous screen 26 Option button Displays a screen for advance function settings 27 Contrast knob Adjusts the contrast of the screen p 25 28 Tone buttons They are used to choose the kinds of tones tone groups played by the keyboard p 28 Piano button Organ button Guitar Bass button Strings button Sax Brass button Voice button 29 One Touch Program button Piano button Makes the optimal settings for a piano performance p 27 Arranger button Makes the optimal settings for playing
349. yed 79 Chapter 3 Song Playback About Audio Files Audio files in the following format can be played back e WAV extension e 16 bit linear e Sampling rate of 44 1 kHz e Stereo You cannot use the following functions in playing back audio files Marker p 98 Displaying notations p 87 Registering Favorites p 82 Transposing p 102 Changing tempos p 94 Track Mute p 97 Recording p 105 Search p 81 Saving or performing other procedures during playback of audio files may cause the song to stop while it is playing 80 Chapter 3 Song Playback E Using Keywords to Search for Songs Song Search You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo V or genre Only the KR s internal songs You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name are searchable 1 e Press the Song button Dez 2 e Touch lt iis The following Song Search screen appears Condition Search screen Name Search screen E Search Touch here to switch these screens abc per om A MNO POR STU UWS O Searching by Conditions 3 e Touch the parameter you want to set then use the dial to select the search conditions With lt Data gt songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs You can use four different criteria in searches Lyrics Chords Finger fingering nu
350. yle User button A User Style screen appears If the User Style screen is not displayed touch lt User gt in the lower part of the screen 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Delete gt A Delete Style screen like the following appears Delete Stule WEE External Memory K3 gt SD ue Stule 1 f fl a Execute 4 Touch lt Media gt 4 to select the strage media 5 Touch o select the Style to be deleted 6 Touch lt Execute gt The selected Style is deleted Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KR s internal memory making it unusable 6 404dby gt 159 Oo ke Q a 5 V Chapter 9 Creating Music Styles Copying Styles on External Memories to the User Memory You can take User Styles saved on external memories and copy them to user memory You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and copy them to external memories 1 Connect the external memory with the Style to be copied to the external memory port 2 Press the User button A User Style screen like the following appears 47108 BUser Stule 1 New Stule 1 Media User Preset If the User Style screen is not displayed touch lt User gt in the lower part of the screen 3 Touch lt File gt 4 Touch lt Copy gt A Copy Style screen like the follow

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Polycom 1725-15993-001 IP Phone User Manual  取扱説明書を必ずご参照下さい。 1/4 **2013 年 8 月 16 日改訂（第 3 版  Ideal Pet RFMO Instructions / Assembly  Point of View Mobii WinTab 800W 16GB 3G White  Manuel d`utilisation Nokia 201  libretto di istruzioni dell'Ariete Robomax Metal.  Samsung SyncMaster  V-150JDF3 の取扱説明書を見る  1 6 - Cloer  Deutsche Telekom Tiptel 275  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file